ZyXEL Communications NBG5715 Simultaneous Dual-Band Wireless N Media Router User Manual NBG5715 UG v1 00 ed1 2011 04 01

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	1542926
Application ID	7Nq6Sgn6RKuGbEArB01f6g==
Document Description	UserMan_I88NBG5715
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	461.98kB (5774737 bits)
Date Submitted	2011-09-16 00:00:00
Date Available	2011-09-16 00:00:00
Creation Date	2011-08-05 13:20:11
Producing Software	pdfFactory Pro 3.10 (Windows XP Professional Chinese)
Document Lastmod	2011-09-06 13:21:24
Document Title	NBG5715_UG_v1-00_ed1_2011-04-01.pdf
Document Creator	pdfFactory Pro www.ahasoft.com.tw/FinePrint
Document Author:	sam

NBG5715
Simultaneous Dual-Band Wireless N Media Router
Default Login Details
IP Address
http://192.168.1.1
Password
1234
Firmware Version 1.0
Edition 1, 3/2011
www.zyxel.com
www.zyxel.com
Copyright © 2011
ZyXEL Communications Corporation
About This User's Guide
About This User's Guide
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for people who want to configure the NBG5715 using the Web Configurator.
You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP/IP networking concepts and topology.
Tips for Reading User’s Guides On-Screen
When reading a ZyXEL User’s Guide On-Screen, keep the following in mind:
• If you don’t already have the latest version of Adobe Reader, you can download it from http://
www.adobe.com.
• Use the PDF’s bookmarks to quickly navigate to the areas that interest you. Adobe Reader’s
bookmarks pane opens by default in all ZyXEL User’s Guide PDFs.
• If you know the page number or know vaguely which page-range you want to view, you can
enter a number in the toolbar in Reader, then press [ENTER] to jump directly to that page.
• Type [CTRL]+[F] to open the Adobe Reader search utility and enter a word or phrase. This can
help you quickly pinpoint the information you require. You can also enter text directly into the
toolbar in Reader.
• To quickly move around within a page, press the [SPACE] bar. This turns your cursor into a
“hand” with which you can grab the page and move it around freely on your screen.
• Embedded hyperlinks are actually cross-references to related text. Click them to jump to the
corresponding section of the User’s Guide PDF.
Related Documentation
• Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get your NBG5715 up and running right away. It
contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access.
• Support Disc
Refer to the included CD for support documents.
Documentation Feedback
Send your comments, questions or suggestions to: techwriters@zyxel.com.tw
Thank you!
The Technical Writing Team, ZyXEL Communications Corp.,
6 Innovation Road II, Science-Based Industrial Park, Hsinchu, 30099, Taiwan.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
About This User's Guide
Need More Help?
More help is available at www.zyxel.com.
• Download Library
Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link. Read the Tech Doc
Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide, Quick Start Guide and Command Line
Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product.
• Knowledge Base
If you have a specific question about your product, the answer may be here. This is a collection
of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products.
• Forum
This contains discussions on ZyXEL products. Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and
share your experiences as well.
Customer Support
Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above, you should contact your
vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you
bought the device.
See http://www.zyxel.com/web/contact_us.php for contact information. Please have the following
information ready when you contact an office.
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Document Conventions
Document Conventions
Warnings and Notes
These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User’s Guide.
Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.
Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may
need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.
Syntax Conventions
• The NBG5715 may be referred to as the “NBG5715”, the “device”, the “product” or the “system”
in this User’s Guide.
• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.
• A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example, [ENTER] means the
“enter” or “return” key on your keyboard.
• “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters and then press the [ENTER] key. “Select”
or “choose” means for you to use one of the predefined choices.
• A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example,
Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel,
then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen.
• Units of measurement may denote the “metric” value or the “scientific” value. For example, “k”
for kilo may denote “1000” or “1024”, “M” for mega may denote “1000000” or “1048576” and so
on.
• “e.g.,” is a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” means “that is” or “in other words”.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Document Conventions
Icons Used in Figures
Figures in this User’s Guide may use the following generic icons. The NBG5715 icon is not an exact
representation of your device.
NBG5715
Computer
Notebook computer
Server
DSLAM
Firewall
Telephone
Switch
Router
Modem
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Safety Warnings
Safety Warnings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
Do NOT store things on the device.
Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock
from lightning.
Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage
points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please
contact your vendor for further information.
Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.
Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or
230V AC in Europe).
Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can
walk on the power adaptor or cord.
Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the power outlet.
Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of
electric shock from lightning.
Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included
antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s).
If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged.
This product is for indoor use only (utilisation intérieure exclusivement).
Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for
Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic
products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment
should be treated separately.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Safety Warnings
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Contents Overview
Contents Overview
User’s Guide ........................................................................................................................... 19
Introduction ................................................................................................................................21
The WPS Button ........................................................................................................................25
ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility ..........................................................................................26
Introducing the Web Configurator ..............................................................................................33
Monitor and Summary ................................................................................................................37
NBG5715 Modes ........................................................................................................................43
Easy Mode .................................................................................................................................44
Router Mode ..............................................................................................................................55
Tutorials .....................................................................................................................................61
Technical Reference .............................................................................................................. 69
WAN ...........................................................................................................................................71
Wireless LAN .............................................................................................................................79
LAN ............................................................................................................................................95
DHCP Server .............................................................................................................................99
NAT ..........................................................................................................................................103
Dynamic DNS ........................................................................................................................... 113
Static Route .............................................................................................................................. 115
Firewall ..................................................................................................................................... 119
IPSec VPN ...............................................................................................................................124
Bandwidth Management ..........................................................................................................147
Remote Management ...............................................................................................................152
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ..............................................................................................155
Maintenance .............................................................................................................................163
Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................171
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Contents Overview
10
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
About This User's Guide .......................................................................................................... 3
Document Conventions ........................................................................................................... 5
Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................ 7
Contents Overview ................................................................................................................... 9
Table of Contents ................................................................................................................... 11
Part I: User’s Guide ................................................................................19
Chapter 1
Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 21
1.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................21
1.2 Applications ..........................................................................................................................22
1.3 Ways to Manage the NBG5715 ...........................................................................................22
1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NBG5715 ............................................................................22
1.5 LEDs ....................................................................................................................................23
Chapter 2
The WPS Button...................................................................................................................... 25
2.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................25
Chapter 3
ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility ...................................................................................... 26
3.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................26
3.1.1 Quick Setup ................................................................................................................26
3.1.2 Installing ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility ............................................................26
3.2 The ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility .............................................................................27
3.2.1 The Menus ..................................................................................................................28
3.2.2 The Share Center Configuration Window ...................................................................29
3.2.3 The Auto-Connect Printer List Window ......................................................................29
3.3 Manually Connecting to USB Devices .................................................................................30
3.4 Automatically Connecting to a USB Printer ..........................................................................31
Chapter 4
Introducing the Web Configurator ........................................................................................ 33
4.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................33
NBG5715 User’s Guide
11
Table of Contents
4.2 Accessing the Web Configurator ..........................................................................................33
4.2.1 Login Screen ..............................................................................................................33
4.2.2 Weather Edit ...............................................................................................................34
4.2.3 Time/Date Edit ............................................................................................................35
4.3 Resetting the NBG5715 .......................................................................................................35
4.3.1 How to Use the RESET Button ...................................................................................35
Chapter 5
Monitor and Summary............................................................................................................ 37
5.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................37
5.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................37
5.3 The Log Screen ....................................................................................................................38
5.3.1 View Log .....................................................................................................................38
5.4 DHCP Table ......................................................................................................................38
5.5 Packet Statistics ................................................................................................................40
5.6 VPN Monitor .........................................................................................................................41
5.7 WLAN_2.4G/5G Station Status
........................................................................................41
Chapter 6
NBG5715 Modes ..................................................................................................................... 43
6.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................43
6.1.1 Web Configurator Modes ............................................................................................43
Chapter 7
Easy Mode ............................................................................................................................... 44
7.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................44
7.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................45
7.3 Navigation Panel ..................................................................................................................45
7.4 Network Map ........................................................................................................................46
7.5 Control Panel .......................................................................................................................47
7.5.1 Game Engine ..............................................................................................................48
7.5.2 Power Saving .............................................................................................................48
7.5.3 Content Filter ..............................................................................................................49
7.5.4 Bandwidth MGMT .......................................................................................................50
7.5.5 Firewall .......................................................................................................................51
7.5.6 Wireless Security ........................................................................................................51
7.5.7 WPS ...........................................................................................................................52
7.6 Status Screen in Easy Mode ................................................................................................53
Chapter 8
Router Mode............................................................................................................................ 55
8.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................55
8.2 Router Mode Status Screen .................................................................................................56
12
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
8.2.1 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................58
Chapter 9
Tutorials ................................................................................................................................... 61
9.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................61
9.2 Set Up a Wireless Network with WPS ..................................................................................61
9.2.1 Push Button Configuration (PBC) ...............................................................................61
9.2.2 PIN Configuration .......................................................................................................63
9.3 Configure Wireless Security without WPS ...........................................................................64
9.3.1 Configure Your Notebook ...........................................................................................65
Part II: Technical Reference...................................................................69
Chapter 10
WAN ......................................................................................................................................... 71
10.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................71
10.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter ......................................................................................71
10.3 What You Need To Know ...................................................................................................71
10.3.1 Configuring Your Internet Connection .......................................................................72
10.3.2 Multicast ...................................................................................................................73
10.4 The Broadband Screen ......................................................................................................73
10.4.1 Ethernet Encapsulation ............................................................................................73
10.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation ..............................................................................................75
10.5 The Advanced Screen ........................................................................................................77
Chapter 11
Wireless LAN........................................................................................................................... 79
11.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................79
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .............................................................................79
11.1.2 What You Should Know ............................................................................................80
11.2 The General Wireless LAN Screen ...................................................................................82
11.3 Wireless Security Modes ....................................................................................................84
11.3.1 No Security ...............................................................................................................84
11.3.2 WEP Encryption ........................................................................................................85
11.3.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK ..............................................................................................86
11.3.4 WPA/WPA2 ...............................................................................................................87
11.4 The MAC Filter Screen .......................................................................................................88
11.5 The Wireless LAN Advanced Screen .................................................................................90
11.6 The QoS Screen .................................................................................................................90
11.7 The WPS Screen ................................................................................................................91
11.8 The WPS Station Screen ....................................................................................................92
NBG5715 User’s Guide
13
Table of Contents
11.9 The Scheduling Screen ......................................................................................................93
Chapter 12
LAN .......................................................................................................................................... 95
12.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................95
12.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter ......................................................................................95
12.3 What You Need To Know ...................................................................................................96
12.3.1 IP Pool Setup ............................................................................................................96
12.3.2 LAN TCP/IP ..............................................................................................................96
12.4 The LAN IP Screen ............................................................................................................97
12.5 The IP Alias Screen ...........................................................................................................97
Chapter 13
DHCP Server ........................................................................................................................... 99
13.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................99
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .............................................................................99
13.1.2 What You Need To Know ..........................................................................................99
13.2 The DHCP Server General Screen ....................................................................................99
13.3 The DHCP Server Advanced Screen .............................................................................100
13.4 The Client List Screen ......................................................................................................101
Chapter 14
NAT......................................................................................................................................... 103
14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................103
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................103
14.1.2 What You Need To Know ........................................................................................104
14.2 The NAT General Screen .................................................................................................105
14.3 The Port Forwarding Screen ..........................................................................................106
14.3.1 Port Forwarding Edit Screen .................................................................................108
14.4 The NAT Advance Screen ................................................................................................109
14.5 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................... 110
14.5.1 NATPort Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers ................................................. 110
14.5.2 NAT Port Forwarding Example ............................................................................... 110
14.5.3 Trigger Port Forwarding .......................................................................................... 110
14.5.4 Trigger Port Forwarding Example ........................................................................... 111
14.5.5 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports ...................................................... 111
Chapter 15
Dynamic DNS ........................................................................................................................ 113
15.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 113
15.1.1 What You Need To Know ........................................................................................ 113
15.2 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................ 114
14
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 16
Static Route ........................................................................................................................... 115
16.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 115
16.2 The Static Route Screen ................................................................................................. 115
16.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route ............................................................................................. 116
Chapter 17
Firewall .................................................................................................................................. 119
17.1 Overview
........................................................................................................................ 119
17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................... 119
17.1.2 What You Need To Know ........................................................................................ 119
17.2 The Firewall General Screen ..........................................................................................121
17.3 The Firewall Services Screen ..........................................................................................121
Chapter 18
IPSec VPN.............................................................................................................................. 124
18.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................124
18.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................124
18.3 What You Need To Know .................................................................................................125
18.3.1 IKE SA (IKE Phase 1) Overview .............................................................................125
18.3.2 IPSec SA (IKE Phase 2) Overview .........................................................................126
18.4 The General Screen .........................................................................................................126
18.5 Edit VPN Rule ..................................................................................................................128
18.5.1 IKEKey Setup .........................................................................................................129
18.5.2 Manual Key Setup ..................................................................................................134
18.5.3 Configuring Manual Key ........................................................................................136
18.6 The SA Monitor Screen ....................................................................................................139
18.7 Technical Reference .........................................................................................................139
18.7.1 IPSec Architecture ..................................................................................................140
18.7.2 Encapsulation .........................................................................................................141
18.7.3 IKE Phases ............................................................................................................142
18.7.4 Negotiation Mode ...................................................................................................142
18.7.5 IPSec and NAT .......................................................................................................143
18.7.6 VPN, NAT, and NAT Traversal ................................................................................143
18.7.7 ID Type and Content ...............................................................................................144
18.7.8 Pre-Shared Key ......................................................................................................145
18.7.9 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Groups .............................................................................146
Chapter 19
Bandwidth Management....................................................................................................... 147
19.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................147
19.2 What You Can Do this Chapter ........................................................................................147
19.3 What You Need To Know .................................................................................................147
NBG5715 User’s Guide
15
Table of Contents
19.4 General Screen ...............................................................................................................148
19.5 Advance Screen ..............................................................................................................148
19.5.1 Rule Configuration: User Defined Service Rule Configuration ............................151
Chapter 20
Remote Management............................................................................................................ 152
20.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................152
20.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................152
20.3 What You Need to Know ..................................................................................................152
20.3.1 Remote Management and NAT ..............................................................................152
20.3.2 System Timeout .....................................................................................................153
20.4 WWW Screen ................................................................................................................153
20.5 Telnet Screen ................................................................................................................154
Chapter 21
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP).......................................................................................... 155
21.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................155
21.2 What You Need to Know ..................................................................................................155
21.2.1 NAT Traversal .........................................................................................................155
21.2.2 Cautions with UPnP ................................................................................................155
21.3 UPnP Screen ..................................................................................................................156
21.4 Technical Reference .........................................................................................................156
21.4.1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ....................................................................156
21.4.2 Web Configurator Easy Access ..............................................................................159
Chapter 22
Maintenance .......................................................................................................................... 163
22.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................163
22.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................163
22.3 General Screen ................................................................................................................163
22.4 Password Screen .............................................................................................................164
22.5 Time Setting Screen .........................................................................................................165
22.6 Firmware Upgrade Screen ...............................................................................................166
22.7 Backup/Restore Screen ...................................................................................................167
22.8 The Language Screen ......................................................................................................169
Chapter 23
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................... 171
23.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................171
23.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs .......................................................................171
23.3 NBG5715 Access and Login ............................................................................................172
23.4 Internet Access ................................................................................................................174
23.5 Resetting the NBG5715 to Its Factory Defaults ...............................................................175
16
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
23.6 Wireless Router Troubleshooting .....................................................................................175
23.7 USB Device Problems ......................................................................................................176
23.8 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Problems ................................................................177
Appendix A Product Specifications ...................................................................................... 179
23.9 Wall-mounting Instructions ...............................................................................................181
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions ....................................... 183
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting........................................................................... 195
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address .......................................................... 205
Appendix E Wireless LANs.................................................................................................. 233
Appendix F Common Services ............................................................................................ 247
Appendix G Open Software Announcements ...................................................................... 251
Appendix H Legal Information ............................................................................................. 281
Index ...................................................................................................................................... 287
NBG5715 User’s Guide
17
Table of Contents
18
NBG5715 User’s Guide
P ART I
User’s Guide
19
20
CHAPTER
Introduction
1.1 Overview
This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the NBG5715.
The NBG5715 extends the range of your existing wired network without additional wiring, providing
easy network access to mobile users. You can set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802.11a/b/
g/n compatible devices. The NBG5715 is able to function both 2.4G and 5G network at the same
time.
A range of services such as a firewall and content filtering are also available for secure Internet
computing. You can use media bandwidth management to efficiently manage traffic on your
network. Bandwidth management features allow you to prioritize time-sensitive or highly important
applications such as Voice over the Internet (VoIP).
There are two USB 2.0 ports on the side panel of your NBG5715. You can connect USB (version 2.0
or lower) memory sticks, USB hard drives, or USB devices for file sharing. The NBG5715
automatically detects the USB devices.
Two USB eject buttons are located above the USB ports. Push the eject button of the corresponding
USB port for 2 seconds. Make sure the USB LED is off before removing your USB device. This will
remove your USB device safely, preventing file or data loss if it is being transmitted through the
USB device.
Figure 1 USB Ports and Eject Buttons
Eject buttons
USB ports
NBG5715 User’s Guide
21
Chapter 1 Introduction
Note: For the USB function, it is strongly recommended to use version 2.0 or lower USB
storage devices (such as memory sticks, USB hard drives) and/or USB devices
(such as USB printers). Other USB products are not guaranteed to function properly
with the NBG5715.
Note: Be sure to install the ZyXEL NetUSBTM Share Center Utility (for NetUSB
functionality) from the included disc, or download the latest version from the
zyxel.com website. See Chapter 3 on page 26 for more information.
1.2 Applications
Your can create the following networks using the NBG5715:
• Wired. You can connect network devices via the Ethernet ports of the NBG5715 so that they can
communicate with each other and access the Internet.
• Wireless. Wireless clients can connect to the NBG5715 to access network resources.
• WAN. Connect to a broadband modem/router for Internet access.
• WPS. Create an instant network connection with another WPS-compatible device, sharing your
network connection with it.
• NetUSB. The NBG5715 allows you to connect a USB device (such as printer, scanner, or portable
hard disk) directly to the USB port and then share that device over the Internet. You can also
connect a USB to the NBG5715, which can then share up to 3 additional USB devices with the
rest of your personal home network.
1.3 Ways to Manage the NBG5715
Use any of the following methods to manage the NBG5715.
• WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). You can use the WPS button or the WPS section of the Web
Configurator to set up a wireless network with your NBG5715.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the NBG5715 using a
(supported) web browser.
1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NBG5715
Do the following things regularly to make the NBG5715 more secure and to manage the NBG5715
more effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different
types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
22
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introduction
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier
working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you
forget your password, you will have to reset the NBG5715 to its factory default settings. If you
backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the NBG5715.
You could simply restore your last configuration.
1.5 LEDs
Look at the LED lights on the front panel to determine the status of the NBG5715. Use the LED
button at the side panel of the device to turn the LED lights on or off. If you have already pushed
the LED button to the ON position but none of the LEDS are on, make sure the NBG5715 is
receiving power and the power is turned on.
Note: The Power LED will be on even if you push the LED button to the OFF position.
This is for you to determine whether the NBG5715 is powered on.
Figure 2 LED Button
LED button
NBG5715 User’s Guide
23
Chapter 1 Introduction
Figure 3 Front Panel
Power
Internet
WAN
WLAN 2.4G
WLAN 5G
WPS
Button
USB 1-2
LAN 1-4
WPS
The following table describes the LEDs and the WPS button.
Table 1 Front panel LEDs and WPS button
LED
STATUS
WPS Button
Press this button for 1 second to set up a wireless connection via WiFi Protected Setup
with another WPS-enabled client. You must press the WPS button on the client side within
120 seconds for a successful connection. See Chapter 2 on page 25 and Chapter 9 on
page 61 for more information on WPS.
Power
On
The NBG5715 is receiving power and functioning properly.
Off
The NBG5715 is not receiving power.
WAN
Internet
DESCRIPTION
On
The NBG5715’s WAN connection is ready.
Blinking
The NBG5715 is sending/receiving data through the WAN with a 1000Mbps
transmission rate.
Off
The WAN connection is not ready, or has failed.
On
The NBG5715 has an IP connection but no traffic.
Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP
server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the
connection is up.
WLAN 2.4/5G
Blinking
The NBG5715 is sending or receiving IP traffic.
Off
The NBG5715 does not have an IP connection.
On
The NBG5715 is ready, but is not sending/receiving data through the 5G
wireless LAN.
Blinking
The NBG5715 is sending/receiving data through the 5G wireless LAN.
The NBG5715 is negotiating a WPS connection with a wireless client.
LAN 1-4
USB 1-2
24
Off
The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed.
On
The NBG5715’s LAN connection is ready.
Blinking
The NBG5715 is sending/receiving data through the LAN with a 1000Mbps
transmission rate.
Off
The LAN connection is not ready, or has failed.
On
The NBG5715 has a USB device installed.
Blinking
The NBG5715 is transmitting and/or receiving data from routers through an
installed USB device.
Off
There is no USB device connected to the NBG5715.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
The WPS Button
2.1 Overview
Your NBG5715 supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure
wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both
devices must support WPS (check each device’s documentation to make sure).
Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its
configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device
to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two
minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set
up a secure network by themselves.
For more information on using WPS, see Chapter 9 on page 61.
Figure 4 The WPS Button
NBG5715 User’s Guide
25
CHAPTER
ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility
3.1 Overview
The ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility allows you to work with the USB devices that are connected
directly to the NBG5715 as if they are connected directly to your computer. This allows you to easily
share USB-based devices such as printers, scanners, portable hard disks, MP3 players, faxes, and
digital cameras (to name a few) with all the other people in your home or office as long as they are
connected to the NBG5715 and have the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility installed.
Note: Be sure to install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility (for NetUSB functionality)
from the included disc, or download the latest version from the zyxel.com website’s
Download Library.
3.1.1 Quick Setup
This section shows you how to get started using the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility.
Install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility on each computer connected to the NBG5715.
Connect a USB device to the USB port on the NBG5715.
Note: If you are connecting multiple devices to the NBG5715, first connect a USB hub to
the NBG5715 then connect your other USB devices to it.
Run the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility to display a list of all connected USB devices, then use
it to connect your computer to them.
3.1.2 Installing ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility
Before you can access USB devices connected to the NBG5715, you must first install the ZyXEL
NetUSB Share Center Utility on any computer on your LAN to which you want to allow access to
these devices.
Note: In order to properly use the utility with your NBG5715, ensure that the NBG5715
firmware is version v1.00(BWQ.0) or higher. See Chapter 22 on page 166 for
information on updating your device’s firmware.
To install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility:
Insert the disc that came with your NBG5715 into your computer’s disc drive.
Run the Setup program by double-clicking it and then follow the on-screen instructions for
installing it on your computer.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
26
Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility
Note: The following operating systems are supported: Windows XP/Vista/7 (32 and 64-bit
versions).
To open the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility, double-click its system tray icon.
3.2 The ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility
This section describes the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility main window.
Figure 5 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Main Window
The following table describes the icons in this window.
Table 2 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Main Window Icons
ICON
DESCRIPTION
Configure Server
Click to open the NBG5715’s built-in Web Configurator, which you can use to
set up the NBG5715 (see Chapter 4 on page 33 for details).
Auto-Connect Printer
Click this if you want to automatically connect to the printer each time your
start your computer.
Note: You must first install the appropriate print driver on each computer for
which you intend to use this feature. See the documentation that came
with your printer for instructions on how to do this.
Connect
Select a USB device and then click this button to connect to it. Your computer
can connect to as many USB devices as are connected to the NBG5715.
Disconnect
Select a device to which your computer is connected and then click this
button to disconnect from it.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
27
Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility
Table 2 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Main Window Icons (continued)
ICON
DESCRIPTION
Request to Connect
Some USB devices may not allow automatic connections over the network. If
so, select the device in question and click this button to issue a request to
connect to it.
Network Scanner
Click this to open the scanner options on your computer for working with a
scanner connected to the network.
3.2.1 The Menus
This section describes the utility’s menus.
Figure 6 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Menus
The following table describes the menus in this screen.
Table 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Main Screen Menus
MENU
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
System
Exit
This closes the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center
Utility.
Tools
Configuration
This opens the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center
Utility configuration window.
Auto-Connect Printer List
This opens the list window that displays all
of the printing devices connected to the
NBG5715.
Help
About
This opens the about window, which
provides information of the utility software
and driver versions.
Auto-Connect
Printer
Set Auto-Connect Printer
This sets the selected printer to ‘autoconnect’, meaning your computer will always
connect to the printer over the network.
Note: You first must install the appropriate
drivers for the printer that you intend
to use.
Delete Auto-Connect Printer
28
This removes the auto-connect option from
the selected printer.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility
3.2.2 The Share Center Configuration Window
This section describes the utility’s configuration window, which allows you to set certain options for
the utility. These options do not apply to the USB devices connected to the NBG5715.
You can open it by clicking the Tools > Configuration menu command.
Figure 7 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Configuration Window
The following table describes the labels in this window.
Table 4 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Configuration Window
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Basic
Select this to run the utility automatically when you log into or start up
Windows.
Language
Select a language for the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility. You must
restart the utility for the change to take effect.
OK
Click this to save your changes and close the window.
Cancel
Click this cancel to close the window without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes without closing the window.
3.2.3 The Auto-Connect Printer List Window
This section describes the utility’s auto-connect printer list window. You can open it by clicking the
Tools > Auto-Connect Printer List menu command.
Figure 8 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Auto-Connect Printer List Window
NBG5715 User’s Guide
29
Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 5 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Auto-Connect Printer List Window
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server IP & Printer
Name
Displays a list of print server IPs and printer names connected to this
NBG5715.
Windows Printer Name
Displays a corresponding list of Windows printer names connected to this
devices listed in the other list.
Delete
Select an printer from the list and click this to remove it.
Close
Click this to close the window.
3.3 Manually Connecting to USB Devices
This example shows you how to connect to a USB device over your NBG5715 network. Makes sure
that you have first installed the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility on the computer to which you
want to connect the USB devices.
Note: If you do this with a USB printer but do not yet have the print driver installed you
will be prompted to install one by the Windows New Hardware Wizard.
30
Connect a USB device to the NBG5715.
In the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility, select the device and click Connect.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility
The device mounts on your system.
3.4 Automatically Connecting to a USB Printer
This example shows you how to set your computer to automatically connect to a shared USB printer
over your NBG5715 network each time you log into your computer. Makes sure that you have first
installed the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility.
Connect a USB printer to the NBG5715.
Open the ZyXEL NetUSB Sharing Center Utility on the computer that you want to use to connect
to the printer.
Click the Connect button. You may be prompted to install a printer driver or to configure other
settings.
Finally, click the Auto-Connect Printer menu and select Set Auto-Connect Printer from the
menu.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
31
Chapter 3 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility
32
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
Introducing the Web Configurator
4.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to access the NBG5715 Web Configurator and provides an overview of
its screens.
The Web Configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy setup and
management of the NBG5715 via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions,
Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions, or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen
resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in
Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter (Chapter 23 on page 171) to see how to make sure these
functions are allowed in Internet Explorer.
4.2 Accessing the Web Configurator
Make sure your NBG5715 hardware is properly connected and prepare your computer or computer
network to connect to the NBG5715 (refer to the Quick Start Guide).
Launch your web browser.
Type "http://192.168.1.1" as the website address.
Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to access this website address.
4.2.1 Login Screen
Note: If this is the first time you are accessing the Web Configurator, you may be
redirected to the Wizard. Refer to Chapter 4 on page 33 for the Connection Wizard
screens.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
33
Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator
The Web Configurator initially displays the following login screen.
Figure 9 Login screen
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 6 Login screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Language
Select the language you want to use to configure the Web Configurator. Click
Login.
Password
Type "1234" (default) as the password.
This shows the current weather, either in celsius or fahrenheit, of the city you
specify in Section 4.2.2 on page 34.
This shows the time (hh:mm:ss) and date (yyyy:mm:dd) of the timezone you
select in Section 4.2.3 on page 35 or Section 22.5 on page 165. The time is in
24-hour format, for example 15:00 is 3:00 PM.
4.2.2 Weather Edit
You can change the temperature unit and select the location for which you want to know the
weather.
Click the
icon to change the Weather display.
Figure 10 Change Weather
34
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 7 Change Weather
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
oC
Choose which temperature unit you want the NBG5715 to display.
or
oF
Change Location
Select the location for which you want to know the weather. If the city you want
is not listed, choose one that is closest to it.
Finish
Click this to apply the settings and refresh the date and time display.
4.2.3 Time/Date Edit
One timezone can cover more than one country. You can choose a particular country in which the
NBG5715 is located and have the NBG5715 display and use the current time and date for its logs.
Click the
icon to change the Weather display.
Figure 11 Change Password Screen
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 Change Password Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Change time zone
Select the specific country whose current time and date you want the NBG5715
to display.
Finish
Click this to apply the settings and refresh the weather display.
Note: You can also edit the timezone in Section 22.5 on page 165.
4.3 Resetting the NBG5715
If you forget your password or IP address, or you cannot access the Web Configurator, you will need
to use the RESET button at the back of the NBG5715 to reload the factory-default configuration
file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously saved, the password
will be reset to “1234” and the IP address will be reset to “192.168.1.1”.
4.3.1 How to Use the RESET Button
Make sure the power LED is on.
Press the RESET button for longer than 1 second to restart/reboot the NBG5715.
Press the RESET button for longer than 5 seconds to set the NBG5715 back to its factory-default
configurations.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
35
Chapter 4 Introducing the Web Configurator
36
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
Monitor and Summary
5.1 Overview
This chapter discusses read-only information related to the device state of the NBG5715.
To access the Monitor screens, go to Expert Mode after login, then click
You can also click the Details links in the Summary table of the Status screen to view the
bandwidth consumed, packets sent/received as well as the status of clients connected to the
NBG5715.
5.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the Log screens to see the logs for the activity on the NBG5715 (Section 5.3 on page 38).
• Use the DHCP Table screen to view information related to your DHCP status (Section 5.4 on
page 38).
• use the Packet Statistics screen to view port status, packet specific statistics, the "system up
time" and so on (Section 5.5 on page 40).
• Use the VPN Monitor screen to view the active VPN connections (Section 5.6 on page 41).
• Use the WLAN_2.4G/5G Station Status screen to view the 2.4G wireless stations that are
currently associated to the NBG5715 (Section 5.7 on page 41).
NBG5715 User’s Guide
37
Chapter 5 Monitor and Summary
5.3 The Log Screen
The Web Configurator allows you to look at all of the NBG5715’s logs in one location.
5.3.1 View Log
Use the View Log screen to see the logged messages for the NBG5715. The log wraps around and
deletes the old entries after it fills. Select what logs you want to see from the Display drop list. The
log choices depend on your settings in the Log Settings screen. Click Refresh to renew the log
screen. Click Clear to delete all the logs.
Figure 12 View Log
You can configure which logs to display in the View Log screen. Go to the Log Settings screen
and select the logs you wish to display. Click Apply to save your settings. Click Refresh to start the
screen afresh.
Figure 13 Log Settings
5.4 DHCP Table
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to
obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the NBG5715’s LAN as a
DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the NBG5715 provides the TCP/IP
configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on
that network, or else the computer must be manually configured.
Click Monitor > DHCP Table or the DHCP Table (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen.
Read-only information here relates to your DHCP status. The DHCP table shows current DHCP client
38
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Monitor and Summary
information (including MAC Address, IP Address, and Expiration time) of all network clients
using the NBG5715’s DHCP server.
Figure 14 Summary: DHCP Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 9 Summary: DHCP Table
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the index number of the host computer.
Status
This field displays whether the connection to the host computer is up (a yellow bulb)
or down (a gray bulb).
Host Name
This field displays the computer host name.
IP Address
This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
MAC Address
This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Host Name
field.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address which
uniquely identifies a device. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists
of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
Reserve
Select this if you want to reserve the IP address for this specific MAC address.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Reset
Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
39
Chapter 5 Monitor and Summary
5.5 Packet Statistics
Click Monitor > Packet Statistics or the Packet Statistics (Details...) hyperlink in the Status
screen. Read-only information here includes port status, packet specific statistics and the "system
up time". The Poll Interval(s) field is configurable and is used for refreshing the screen.
Figure 15 Summary: Packet Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 10 Summary: Packet Statistics
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Port
This is the NBG5715’s port type.
Status
For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or Down
when the line is disconnected.
For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you’re using
Ethernet encapsulation and Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a
call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation.
This field displays Down when the line is disconnected.
For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is
enabled and Down when the WLAN is disabled.
40
TxPkts
This is the number of transmitted packets on this port.
RxPkts
This is the number of received packets on this port.
Collisions
This is the number of collisions on this port.
Tx B/s
This displays the transmission speed in bytes per second on this port.
Rx B/s
This displays the reception speed in bytes per second on this port.
Up Time
This is the total time the NBG5715 has been for each session.
System Up Time
This is the total time the NBG5715 has been on.
Poll Interval(s)
Enter the time interval in seconds for refreshing statistics in this field.
Set Interval
Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll
Interval(s) field.
Stop
Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Monitor and Summary
5.6 VPN Monitor
Click Monitor > VPN Monitor or the VPN Monitor (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen.
This screen displays read-only information about the active VPN connections. Click the Refresh
button to update the screen. A Security Association (SA) is the group of security settings related to
a specific VPN tunnel.
Figure 16 Summary: Security Associations
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 11 Summary: Security Associations
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Status
This field displays whether the VPN connection is up (a yellow bulb) or
down (a gray bulb).
Connection Name
This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy.
Remote Gateway
This is the static WAN IP address or URL of the remote IPSec router.
Local Address
This is the IP address of computer(s) on your local network behind your
NBG5715.
Remote Address
This is the IP address of computer(s) on the remote network behind the
remote IPSec router.
Refresh
Click this button to update the screen’s statistics immediately.
5.7 WLAN_2.4G/5G Station Status
Click Monitor > WLAN_2.4G/5G Station Status or the WLAN 2.4G/5G WLAN Station Status
(Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. View the wireless stations that are currently associated
to the NBG5715 in the Association List. Association means that a wireless client (for example,
your network or computer with a wireless network card) has connected successfully to the AP (or
wireless router) using the same SSID, channel and security settings.
Figure 17 Summary: Wireless Association List
NBG5715 User’s Guide
41
Chapter 5 Monitor and Summary
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 12 Summary: Wireless Association List
42
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the index number of an associated wireless station.
MAC Address
This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station.
Association Time
This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the
NBG5715’s WLAN network.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
NBG5715 Modes
6.1 Overview
This chapter introduces the different modes available on your NBG5715. First, the term “mode”
refers to two things in this User’s Guide.
• Web Configurator mode. This refers to the Web Configurator interface you want to use for
editing NBG5715 features.
• Router mode: This is the device mode of the NBG5715. Use this mode to connect the local
network to another network, like the Internet. Go to Section 8.2 on page 56 to view the Status
screen in this mode.
6.1.1 Web Configurator Modes
This refers to the configuration interface of the Web Configurator, which has two modes:
• Easy: The Web Configurator shows this mode by default. Refer to Chapter 7 on page 44 for more
information on the screens in this mode. This interface may be sufficient for users who just want
to use the device.
• Expert: Advanced users can change to this mode to customize all the functions of the NBG5715.
Click Expert Mode after logging into the Web Configurator. The User’s Guide Chapter 4 on page
33 discusses the screens in this mode.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
43
CHAPTER
Easy Mode
7.1 Overview
The Web Configurator is set to Easy Mode by default. You can configure several key features of the
NBG5715 in this mode. This mode is useful to users who are not fully familiar with some features
that are usually intended for network administrators.
When you log in to the Web Configurator, the following screen opens.
Figure 18 Easy Mode: Network Map
Navigation Panel
Network Map
Go to
Status
Screen
Control Panel
NBG5715 User’s Guide
44
Chapter 7 Easy Mode
Click Status to open the following screen.
Figure 19 Easy Mode: Status Screen
Navigation Panel
Go to
Network
Map
Screen
Status Screen
Control Panel
7.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter
You can do the following in this mode:
• Use this Navigation Panel to opt out of the Easy mode (Section 7.3 on page 45).
• Use the Network Map screen to check if your NBG5715 can ping the gateway and whether it is
connected to the Internet (Section 7.4 on page 46).
• Use the Control Panel to configure and enable NBG5715 features, including wireless security,
wireless scheduling and bandwidth management and so on (Section 7.5 on page 47).
• Use the Status Screen to view read-only information about the NBG5715, including the WAN IP,
MAC Address of the NBG5715 and the firmware version (Section 7.6 on page 53).
7.3 Navigation Panel
Use this navigation panel to opt out of the Easy mode.
Figure 20 Control Panel
NBG5715 User’s Guide
45
Chapter 7 Easy Mode
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 13 Control Panel
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Home
Click this to go to the Login page.
Expert Mode
Click this to change to Expert mode and customize features of the
NBG5715.
Logout
Click this to end the Web Configurator session.
7.4 Network Map
Note: The Network MAP is viewable by Windows XP (need to install patch), Windows
Vista and Windows 7 users only. For Windows XP (Service Pack 2) users, you can
see the network devices connected to the NBG5715 by downloading the LLTD (Link
Layer Topology Discovery) patch from the Microsoft Website.
Note: Don’t worry if the Network Map does not display in your web browser. This feature
may not be supported by your system. You can still configure the Control Panel
(Section 7.5 on page 47) in the Easy Mode and the NBG5715 features that you
want to use in the Expert Mode.
When you log into the Network Configurator, the Network Map is shown as follows.
Figure 21 Network Map
The line connecting the NBG5715 to the gateway becomes green when the NBG5715 is able to ping
the gateway. It becomes red when the ping initiating from the NBG5715 does not get a response
from the gateway. The same rule applies to the line connecting the gateway to the Internet.
You can also view the devices (represented by icons indicating the kind of network device)
connected to the NBG5715, including those connecting wirelessly. Right-click on the NBG5715 icon
to refresh the network map and go to the Wizard. Right click on the other icons to view information
about the device.
46
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Easy Mode
7.5 Control Panel
The features configurable in Easy Mode are shown in the Control Panel.
Figure 22 Control Panel
Switch ON to enable the feature. Otherwise, switch OFF. If the feature is turned on, the green light
flashes. If it is turned off, the red light flashes.
Additionally, click the feature to open a screen where you can edit its settings.
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 14 Control Panel
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Game Engine
Switch ON to maximize bandwidth for gaming traffic in your network.
Otherwise, switch OFF.
Power Saving
Click this to schedule the wireless feature of the NBG5715.
Refer to Section 7.5.1 on page 48 to see this screen.
Disabling the wireless function helps lower the energy consumption of the
NBG5715.
Switch ON to apply wireless scheduling. Otherwise, switch OFF.
Refer to Section 7.5.2 on page 48 to see this screen.
Content Filter
Click this to restrict access to certain websites, based on keywords
contained in URLs, to which you do not want users in your network to
open.
Switch ON to apply website filtering. Otherwise, switch OFF.
Refer to Section 7.5.3 on page 49 to see this screen.
Bandwidth MGMT
Click this to edit bandwidth management for predefined applications.
Switch ON to have the NBG5715 management bandwidth for uplink and
downlink traffic according to an application or service. Otherwise, switch
OFF.
Refer to Section 7.5.4 on page 50 to see this screen.
Firewall
Switch ON to ensure that your network is protected from Denial of Service
(DoS) attacks. Otherwise, switch OFF.
Refer to Section 7.5.5 on page 51 to see this screen.
Wireless Security
Click this to configure the wireless security, such as SSID, security mode
and WPS key on your NBG5715.
Refer to Section 7.5.6 on page 51 to see this screen.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
47
Chapter 7 Easy Mode
7.5.1 Game Engine
When this feature is enabled, the NBG5715 maximizes the bandwidth for gaming traffic that
it forwards out through an interface.
Figure 23 Game Engine
Note: When this is switched on, the Game Console tab in the Bandwidth Mgmt screen is
automatically positioned on top.
Turn this off if your network is not using gaming.
Click OK to close this screen.
7.5.2 Power Saving
Use this screen to set the day of the week and time of the day when your wireless LAN is turned on
and off. Wireless LAN scheduling is disabled by default.
Disabling the wireless capability lowers the energy consumption of the of the NBG5715.
Figure 24 Power Saving
48
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Easy Mode
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 15 Power Saving
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Radio
Choose whether you want to apply the power saving schedule to 2.4G hz or 5G
hz wireless radio.
WLAN Status
Select On or Off to specify whether the Wireless LAN is turned on or off
(depending on what you selected in the WLAN Status field). This field works in
conjunction with the Day and For the following times fields.
Day
Select Everyday or the specific days to turn the Wireless LAN on or off.
If you select Everyday you can not select any specific days. This field works in
conjunction with the For the following times field.
Except for the
following times
(24-Hour Format)
Select a begin time using the first set of hour and minute (min) drop down
boxes and select an end time using the second set of hour and minute (min)
drop down boxes. If you have chosen On earlier for the WLAN Status the
Wireless LAN will turn on between the two times you enter in these fields. If you
have chosen Off earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn off
between the two times you enter in these fields.
In this time format, midnight is 00:00 and progresses up to 24:00. For example,
6:00 PM is 18:00.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
7.5.3 Content Filter
Use this screen to restrict access to certain websites, based on keywords contained in URLs, to
which you do not want users in your network to open.
Figure 25 Content Filter
NBG5715 User’s Guide
49
Chapter 7 Easy Mode
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 16 Content Filter
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add
Click Add after you have typed a keyword.
Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are allowed.
Note: The NBG5715 does not recognize wildcard characters as keywords.
When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will get a
message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request.
Delete
Highlight a keyword in the text box and click Delete to remove it. The keyword
disappears from the text box after you click Apply.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to close this screen without saving any changes.
7.5.4 Bandwidth MGMT
Use this screen to set bandwidth allocation to pre-defined services and applications for bandwidth
allocation.
The NBG5715 uses bandwidth management for incoming and outgoing traffic. Rank the services
and applications by dragging them accordingly from High to Low and click Apply. Click Cancel to
close the screen.
Figure 26 Bandwidth MGNT
Use your mouse
to drag the items
according to how
you want to
prioritize them.
Left-click and
slide up or down.
50
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Easy Mode
7.5.5 Firewall
Enable this feature to protect the network from Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. The NBG5715
blocks repetitive pings from the WAN that can otherwise cause systems to slow down or hang.
Figure 27 Firewall
Click OK to close this screen.
7.5.6 Wireless Security
Use this screen to configure security for your the Wireless LAN. You can enter the SSID and select
the wireless security mode in the following screen.
Note: You can enable the Wireless function of your NBG5715 by first turning on the
switch in the side panel.
Figure 28 Wireless Security
The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen.
Table 17 Wireless Security
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Radio
Choose whether you want to apply the wireless security to 2.4G hz or 5G hz
wireless radio.
Wireless
Network Name
(SSID)
(Service Set IDentity) The SSID identifies the Service Set with which a wireless
station is associated. Wireless stations associating to the access point (AP) must
have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 keyboard characters) for
the wireless LAN.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
51
Chapter 7 Easy Mode
Table 17 Wireless Security (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security mode
Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK to add security on this wireless network. The
wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless
security settings as this device. After you select to use a security, additional options
appears in this screen.
Select No Security to allow any client to connect to this network without
authentication.
Wireless
password
This field appears when you choose wither WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK as the
security mode.
Verify
password
Type the password again to confirm.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to close this screen.
WPS
Click this to configure the WPS screen.
Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive keyboard characters.
You can transfer the wireless settings configured here (Wireless Security screen)
to another wireless device that supports WPS.
7.5.7 WPS
Use this screen to add a wireless station to the network using WPS. Click WPS in the Wireless
Security to open the following screen.
Figure 29 Wireless Security: WPS
52
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Easy Mode
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 18 Wireless Security: WPS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Security
Click this to go back to the Wireless Security screen.
WPS
Create a secure wireless network simply by pressing a button.
The NBG5715 scans for a WPS-enabled device within the range and performs
wireless security information synchronization.
Note: After you click the WPS button on this screen, you have to press a similar
button in the wireless station utility within 2 minutes. To add the second
wireless station, you have to press these buttons on both device and the
wireless station again after the first 2 minutes.
Register
Create a secure wireless network simply by entering a wireless client's PIN
(Personal Identification Number) in the NBG5715’s interface and pushing this
button.
Type the same PIN number generated in the wireless station’s utility. Then click
Register to associate to each other and perform the wireless security
information synchronization.
Exit
Click Exit to close this screen.
7.6 Status Screen in Easy Mode
In the Network Map screen, click Status to view read-only information about the NBG5715.
Figure 30 Status Screen in Easy Mode
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 19 Status Screen in Easy Mode
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Name
This is the name of the NBG5715 in the network. You can change this in
the Maintenance > General screen in Section 22.3 on page 163.
Time
This is the current system date and time.
The date is in YYYY:MM:DD (Year-Month-Day) format. The time is in
HH:MM:SS (Hour:Minutes:Seconds) format.
WAN IP
This is the IP address of the WAN port.
MAC Address
This is the MAC address of the NBG5715.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
53
Chapter 7 Easy Mode
Table 19 Status Screen in Easy Mode (continued)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Firmware Version
This shows the firmware version of the NBG5715.
The firmware version format shows the trunk version, model code and
release number.
54
Wireless_2.4G/5G
Network Name (SSID)
This shows the SSID of the wireless network. You can configure this in the
Wireless Security screen (Section 7.5.6 on page 51; Section 11.2 on page
82).
Security
This shows the wireless security used by the NBG5715.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
Router Mode
8.1 Overview
The NBG5715 operates as a router. Routers are used to connect the local network to another
network (for example, the Internet). In the figure below, the NBG5715 connects the local network
(LAN1 ~ LAN4) to the Internet.
Figure 31 NBG5715 Network
Modem
Note: The Status screen is shown after changing to the Expert mode of the Web
Configurator. It varies depending on the device mode of your NBG5715.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
55
Chapter 8 Router Mode
8.2 Router Mode Status Screen
Click
to open the status screen.
Figure 32 Status: Router Mode
The following table describes the icons shown in the Status screen.
Table 20 Status: Router Mode
ICON
DESCRIPTION
Click this icon to logout of the web configurator.
Click this icon to view copyright and a link for related product information.
Click this icon to go to Easy Mode. See Chapter 7 on page 44.
Select a number of seconds or None from the drop-down list box to refresh all screen
statistics automatically at the end of every time interval or to not refresh the screen
statistics.
Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics.
Click this icon to see the Status page. The information in this screen depends on the
device mode you select.
Click this icon to see the Monitor navigation menu.
56
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Router Mode
Table 20 Status: Router Mode (continued)
ICON
DESCRIPTION
Click this icon to see the Configuration navigation menu.
Click this icon to see the Maintenance navigation menu.
The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen.
Table 21 Status Screen: Router Mode
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Device Information
Host Name
This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance > General screen. It is
for identification purposes.
Model Number
This is the model name of your device.
MAC Address
This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
Firmware Version
This is the firmware version and the date created.
WAN Information
- IP Address
This shows the WAN port’s IP address.
- IP Subnet Mask
This shows the WAN port’s subnet mask.
- Default Gateway
This shows the WAN port’s gateway IP address.
LAN Information
- IP Address
This shows the LAN port’s IP address.
- IP Subnet Mask
This shows the LAN port’s subnet mask.
- DHCP
This shows the LAN port’s DHCP role - Server or Disable.
WLAN_2.4G Information
- SSID
This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG5715 in the wireless LAN.
- Channel
This shows the channel number which the NBG5715 is currently using over the
wireless LAN.
- Security
This shows the level of wireless security the NBG5715 is using.
WLAN_5G Information
- SSID
This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG5715 in the wireless LAN.
- Channel
This shows the channel number which the NBG5715 is currently using over the
wireless LAN.
- Security
This shows the level of wireless security the NBG5715 is using.
- Firewall
This shows whether the firewall is enabled or not.
System Status
Item
Data
This column shows the type of data the NBG5715 is recording.
This column shows the actual data recorded by the NBG5715.
System Up Time
This is the total time the NBG5715 has been on.
Current Date/Time
This field displays your NBG5715’s present date and time.
System Resource
- CPU Usage
NBG5715 User’s Guide
This displays what percentage of the NBG5715’s processing ability is currently
used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG5715 is running at full load,
and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications
to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example,
using bandwidth management.)
57
Chapter 8 Router Mode
Table 21 Status Screen: Router Mode (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
- Memory Usage
This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG5715 is using.
Interface Status
Interface
This displays the NBG5715 port types. The port types are: WAN, LAN and WLAN.
Status
For the LAN and WAN ports, this field displays Down (line is down) or Up (line is up
or connected).
For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN
is disabled.
Rate
For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N/A when the
line is disconnected.
For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you’re using
Ethernet encapsulation. This field displays N/A when the line is disconnected.
For the WLAN 2.4G/5G, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN
2.4G/5G is enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled.
Summary
Packet Statistics
Click Details... to go to the Monitor > Packet Statistics screen (Section 5.5 on
page 40). Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics.
WLAN_2.4G Station
Status
Click Details... to go to the Monitor > WLAN_2.4G Station Status screen
(Section 5.7 on page 41). Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are
currently associated to the NBG5715.
WLAN_5G Station Status
Click Details... to go to the Monitor > WLAN_5G Station Status screen (Section
5.7 on page 41). Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently
associated to the NBG5715.
IPSec VPN Status
Click Details... to go to the Monitor > VPN Monitor screen (Section 5.4 on page
38). Use this screen to view the active VPN connections.
8.2.1 Navigation Panel
Use the sub-menus on the navigation panel to configure NBG5715 features.
Figure 33 Navigation Panel: Router Mode
58
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Router Mode
The following table describes the sub-menus.
Table 22 Navigation Panel: Router Mode
LINK
TAB
Status
FUNCTION
This screen shows the NBG5715’s general device, system and
interface status information. Use this screen to access the wizard,
and summary statistics tables.
MONITOR
Log
Use this screen to view the list of activities recorded by your
NBG5715.
DHCP Table
Use this screen to view current DHCP client information.
Packet Statistics
Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics.
VPN Monitor
Use this screen to view the active VPN connections.
WLAN_2.4G
Station Status
Use this screen to view the 2.4G wireless stations that are
currently associated to the NBG5715.
WLAN_5G
Station Status
Use this screen to view the 5G wireless stations that are currently
associated to the NBG5715.
CONFIGURATION
Network
WAN
Wireless LAN
2.4G
Wireless LAN
5G
LAN
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Broadband
This screen allows you to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP
address assignment, DNS servers and the WAN MAC address.
Advanced
Use this screen to configure other advanced properties.
General
Use this screen to enable the 2.4G wireless LAN network,
configure its SSID, channel, and the wireless security level.
MAC Filter
Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG5715 to block
access to devices or block the devices from accessing the
NBG5715.
Advanced
This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings.
QoS
Use this screen to configure Wi-Fi Multimedia Quality of Service
(WMM QoS). WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic
according to the delivery requirements of individual services.
WPS
Use this screen to configure WPS.
WPS Station
Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS.
Scheduling
Use this screen to schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled.
General
Use this screen to enable the 5G wireless LAN network, configure
its SSID, channel, and the wireless security level.
MAC Filter
Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG5715 to block
access to devices or block the devices from accessing the
NBG5715.
Advanced
This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings.
QoS
Use this screen to configure Wi-Fi Multimedia Quality of Service
(WMM QoS). WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic
according to the delivery requirements of individual services.
WPS
Use this screen to configure WPS.
WPS Station
Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS.
Scheduling
Use this screen to schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled.
IP
Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask.
IP Alias
Use this screen to have the NBG5715 apply IP alias to create LAN
subnets.
59
Chapter 8 Router Mode
Table 22 Navigation Panel: Router Mode (continued)
LINK
TAB
FUNCTION
General
Use this screen to enable the NBG5715’s DHCP server.
Advanced
Use this screen to assign IP addresses to specific individual
computers based on their MAC addresses and to have DNS
servers assigned by the DHCP server.
Client List
Use this screen to view information related to your DHCP status.
General
Use this screen to enable NAT.
Port
Forwaring
Use this screen to configure forward incoming service requests to
the server(s) on your local network.
NAT
Advanced
Use this screen to change your NBG5715’s port triggering
settings.
Dynamic
DNS
Dynamic DNS
Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS.
Static Route
Static Route
Use this screen to configure IP static routes.
General
Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall.
Services
This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules, and allows you
to edit/add a firewall rule.
General
Use this screen to display and manage the NBG5715’s VPN rules
(tunnels).
SA Monitor
Use this screen to display and manage active VPN connections.
Bandwidth
MGMT
General
Use this screen to enable bandwidth management.
Advance
Use this screen to set the upstream bandwidth and edit a
bandwidth management rule.
Remote
MGMT
WWW
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from
which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the
NBG5715.
Telnet
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from
which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the
NBG5715.
UPnP
Use this screen to enable UPnP on the NBG5715.
General
General
Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such
as system and domain names.
Password
Password
Setup
Use this screen to change the password of your NBG5715.
Time
Time Setting
Use this screen to change your NBG5715’s time and date.
Firmware
Upgrade
Firmware
Upgrade
Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG5715.
Backup/
Restore
Backup/
Restore
Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset
the factory defaults to your NBG5715.
Language
Language
This screen allows you to select the language you prefer.
DHCP Server
NAT
Security
Firewall
IPSec VPN
Management
UPnP
MAINTENANCE
60
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
Tutorials
9.1 Overview
This chapter provides tutorials for setting up your NBG5715.
• Set Up a Wireless Network with WPS
• Configure Wireless Security without WPS
9.2 Set Up a Wireless Network with WPS
This section gives you an example of how to set up wireless network using WPS. This example uses
the NBG5715 as the AP and NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to a notebook.
Wireless LAN 2.4G is used as the wireless mode in this example.
Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter
or PCI card).
There are two WPS methods for creating a secure connection. This tutorial shows you how to do
both.
• Push Button Configuration (PBC) - create a secure wireless network simply by pressing a
button. See Section 9.2.1 on page 61.This is the easier method.
• PIN Configuration - create a secure wireless network simply by entering a wireless client's PIN
(Personal Identification Number) in the NBG5715’s interface. See Section 9.2.2 on page 63. This
is the more secure method, since one device can authenticate the other.
9.2.1 Push Button Configuration (PBC)
Make sure that your NBG5715 is turned on. The wireless LAN is enabled by default. Check if WLAN
2.4G LED is on. If not, you can enable wireless LAN by pressing the WLAN On/Off button on the
device’s side panel or in the Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G screen. Make sure that the device is
placed within range of your computer.
Make sure that you have installed the wireless client (this example uses the NWD210N) driver and
utility in your notebook.
In the wireless client utility, find the WPS settings. Enable WPS and press the WPS button (Start or
WPS button).
NBG5715 User’s Guide
61
Chapter 9 Tutorials
Log into NBG5715’s Web Configurator and press the Push Button in the Configuration >
Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G > WPS Station screen.
Note: Your NBG5715 has a WPS button located on its front panel, as well as a WPS button
in its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function; you can
use one or the other.
Note: It doesn’t matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button
within two minutes of pressing the first one.
The NBG5715 sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to
two minutes. Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG5715 securely.
The following figure shows you an example to set up wireless network and security by pressing a
button on both NBG5715 and wireless client (the NWD210N in this example).
Figure 34 Example WPS Process: PBC Method
Wireless Client
Access Point
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
62
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Tutorials
9.2.2 PIN Configuration
When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both NBG5715’s configuration
interface and the client’s utilities.
Launch your wireless client’s configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method
to get a PIN number.
Enter the PIN number to the PIN field in the Configuration > Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G >
WPS Station screen on the NBG5715.
Click Start buttons (or button next to the PIN field) on both the wireless client utility screen and the
NBG5715’s WPS Station screen within two minutes.
The NBG5715 authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the
wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. Then the wireless client is able to communicate
with the NBG5715 securely.
The following figure shows you the example to set up wireless network and security on NBG5715
and wireless client (ex. NWD210N in this example) by using PIN method.
Figure 35 Example WPS Process: PIN Method
Access Point
Wireless Client
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
NBG5715 User’s Guide
63
Chapter 9 Tutorials
9.3 Configure Wireless Security without WPS
This example shows you how to configure wireless security settings with the following parameters
on your NBG5715.
Wireless LAN Mode 2.4G
SSID
SSID_Example3
Channel
Security
WPA-PSK
(Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey)
Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your NBG5715.
The instructions require that your hardware is connected (see the Quick Start Guide) and you are
logged into the Web Configurator through your LAN connection (see Section 4.2 on page 33).
64
Open the Configuration > Wireless LAN 2.4G > General screen in the AP’s Web Configurator.
Confirm that the status of wireless LAN is enabled.
Enter SSID_Example3 as the SSID and select Channel-06 as the channel.
Set security mode to WPA-PSK and enter ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey in the Pre-Shared
Key field. Click Apply.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Tutorials
Open the Status screen. Verify your WLAN 2.4G wireless and wireless security settings under
Device Information and check if the WLAN 2.4G connection is up under Interface Status.
9.3.1 Configure Your Notebook
Note: We use the ZyXEL M-302 wireless adapter utility screens as an example for the
wireless client. The screens may vary for different models.
The NBG5715 supports IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and IEEE 802.11n wireless clients. Make sure
that your notebook or computer’s wireless adapter supports one of these standards.
Wireless adapters come with software sometimes called a “utility” that you install on your
computer. See your wireless adapter’s User’s Guide for information on how to do that.
After you’ve installed the utility, open it. If you cannot see your utility’s icon on your screen, go to
Start > Programs and click on your utility in the list of programs that appears. The utility displays
a list of APs within range, as shown in the example screen below.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
65
Chapter 9 Tutorials
66
Select SSID_Example3 and click Connect.
Select WPA-PSK and type the security key in the following screen. Click Next.
The Confirm Save window appears. Check your settings and click Save to continue.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Tutorials
Check the status of your wireless connection in the screen below. If your wireless connection is
weak or you have no connection, see the Troubleshooting section of this User’s Guide.
If your connection is successful, open your Internet browser and enter http://www.zyxel.com or the
URL of any other web site in the address bar. If you are able to access the web site, your wireless
connection is successfully configured.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
67
Chapter 9 Tutorials
68
NBG5715 User’s Guide
P ART II
Technical Reference
69
70
CHAPTER
10
WAN
10.1 Overview
This chapter discusses the NBG5715’s WAN screens. Use these screens to configure your NBG5715
for Internet access.
A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the
Internet. It connects your private networks such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other
networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations.
Figure 36 LAN and WAN
10.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the Broadband screen to enter your ISP information and set how the computer acquires its
IP, DNS and WAN MAC addresses (Section 10.4 on page 73).
• Use the Advanced screen to enable multicasting (Section 10.5 on page 77).
10.3 What You Need To Know
The information in this section can help you configure the screens for your WAN connection, as well
as enable/disable some advanced features of your NBG5715.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
71
Chapter 10 WAN
10.3.1 Configuring Your Internet Connection
Encapsulation Method
Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set
up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your
ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP
over Ethernet) or PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), they should also provide a username
and password (and service name) for user authentication.
WAN IP Address
The WAN IP address is an IP address for the NBG5715, which makes it accessible from an outside
network. It is used by the NBG5715 to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be
static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the NBG5715 tries to access the
Internet.
If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and
DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP
encapsulation method).
DNS Server Address Assignment
Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice
versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely
important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access
it.
The NBG5715 can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways.
The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you
sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields.
If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the NBG5715’s WAN IP
address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP.
WAN MAC Address
The MAC address screen allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the
factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN. Choose Factory Default
to select the factory assigned default MAC Address.
Otherwise, click Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of
the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the
address will be copied to configuration file. It is recommended that you clone the MAC address prior
to hooking up the WAN Port.
72
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 WAN
10.3.2 Multicast
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient)
or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of
hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1.
Figure 37 Multicast Example
In the multicast example above, systems A and D comprise one multicast group. In multicasting,
the server only needs to send one data stream and this is delivered to systems A and D.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. The NBG5715 supports both IGMP version 1
(IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2 (IGMP-v2).
At start up, the NBG5715 queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership.
After that, the NBG5715 periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/
disabled on the NBG5715 LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the Web Configurator (LAN; WAN). Select
None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces.
10.4 The Broadband Screen
Use this screen to change your NBG5715’s Internet access settings. Click Configuration >
Network > WAN to open the Broadband screen. The screen differs according to the
encapsulation you choose.
10.4.1 Ethernet Encapsulation
NBG5715 User’s Guide
73
Chapter 10 WAN
This screen displays when you select ENET ENCAP (Ethernet encapsulation).
Figure 38 Network > WAN > Broadband: ENET ENCAP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 23 Network > WAN > Broadband: ENET ENCAP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ISP Parameters for Internet Access
Encapsulation
Choose the ENET ENCAP (Ethernet encapsulation) option when the WAN port is
used as a regular Ethernet.
Obtain an IP
Address
Automatically
Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the
default selection.
Static IP Address
Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
IP Address
Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Static IP Address.
Subnet Mask
Enter the Subnet Mask in this field.
Gateway IP
Address
Enter a Gateway IP Address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field.
First DNS Server
Second DNS
Server
Select Obtained From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server
information (and the NBG5715's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays
the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns.
Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS
server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but
leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you
click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP
address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply.
Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not
configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to
access it.
74
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 WAN
Table 23 Network > WAN > Broadband: ENET ENCAP (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
10.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation
The NBG5715 supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF standard
(RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL,
cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPP over Ethernet option is for a dial-up connection using
PPPoE.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing
access control systems (for example Radius).
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a
function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and
offer new IP services for individuals.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no
specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG5715 (rather than individual computers), the computers
on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the NBG5715 does that part of the task.
Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs’ computers will have access.
This screen displays when you select PPPoE encapsulation.
Figure 39 Network > WAN > Broadband: PPPoE
NBG5715 User’s Guide
75
Chapter 10 WAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 24 Network > WAN > Broadband: PPPoE
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ISP Parameters for Internet Access
Encapsulation
Select PPPoE if you connect to your Internet via dial-up.
PPP Information
PPP Username
Type the user name given to you by your ISP.
PPP Password
Type the password associated with the user name above.
PPP Auto
Connect
Select this option if you do not want the connection to time out.
IDLE Timeout
This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router
automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server.
PPPoE Service
Name
Enter the name of your PPPoE service here.
WAN IP Address Assignment
Get
automatically
from ISP
Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the
default selection.
Use Fixed IP
Address
Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
My WAN IP
Address
Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address.
DNS Server
First DNS Server
Second DNS
Server
Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the
NBG5715's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS
server IP address that the ISP assigns.
Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS
server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave
the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click
Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP
address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply.
Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure
a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it.
76
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 WAN
10.5 The Advanced Screen
To change your NBG5715’s advanced WAN settings, click Network > WAN > Advanced. The
screen appears as shown. You can use this screen to enable multicast.
Figure 40 Network > WAN > Advanced
Table 25 Network > WAN > Advance
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Multicast Setup
Select IGMPv1/v2 to enable multicasting. This applies to traffic routed
from the WAN to the LAN.
Select None to disable this feature. This may cause incoming traffic to be
dropped or sent to all connected network devices.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
77
Chapter 10 WAN
78
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
11
Wireless LAN
11.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your NBG5715. The
NBG5715 is able to function both 2.4G and 5G network at the same time. You can have different
wireless settings for 2.4G and 5G. Click Configuration > Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G or
Wireless LAN 5G to configure to do so.
See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks.
The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.
Figure 41 Example of a Wireless Network
The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B are
called wireless clients. The wireless clients use the access point (AP) to interact with other devices
(such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your NBG5715 is the AP.
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the General screen to enable or disable wireless LAN, configure SSID, operating channel,
and wireless security (Section 11.2 on page 82).
• Use the MAC Filter screen to allow or deny wireless stations based on their MAC addresses from
connecting to the NBG5715 (Section 11.4 on page 88).
NBG5715 User’s Guide
79
Chapter 11 Wireless LAN
• Use the Advanced screen to allow intra-BSS networking and set the RTS/CTS Threshold (Section
11.5 on page 90).
• Use the QoS screen to ensure Quality of Service (QoS) in your wireless network (Section 11.6 on
page 90).
• Use the WPS screen to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually (Section 11.7 on page 91).
• Use the WPS Station screen to add a wireless station using WPS (Section 11.8 on page 92).
• Use the Scheduling screen to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off (Section 11.9
on page 93).
11.1.2 What You Should Know
Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.
• Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID.
The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentity.
• If two wireless networks overlap, they should use different channels.
Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or
frequency, to send and receive information.
• Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP.
Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the
information that is sent in the wireless network.
Wireless Security Overview
The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless
network.
SSID
Normally, the AP acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the
SSID instead, in which case the AP does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change
the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess.
This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized devices to
get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the
wireless network.
MAC Address Filter
Every wireless client has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is
usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or
00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each wireless client, see the appropriate User’s
Guide or other documentation.
80
1.
Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds
of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.
2.
Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Wireless LAN
You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AP which wireless clients are allowed or not allowed to
use the wireless network. If a wireless client is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to
have the correct settings (SSID, channel, and security). If a wireless client is not allowed to use the
wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct settings.
This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.
Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the MAC address of an authorized
wireless client. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network.
User Authentication
You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it. This is called user
authentication. However, every wireless client in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x
to do this.
For wireless networks, there are two typical places to store the user names and passwords for each
user.
• In the AP: this feature is called a local user database or a local database.
• In a RADIUS server: this is a server used in businesses more than in homes.
If your AP does not provide a local user database and if you do not have a RADIUS server, you
cannot set up user names and passwords for your users.
Unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they
cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to
get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the
wireless network.
Local user databases also have an additional limitation that is explained in the next section.
Encryption
Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless
network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot
understand the message.
The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of user authentication. (See page 81
for information about this.)
Table 26 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication
Weakest
NO AUTHENTICATION
RADIUS SERVER
No Security
WPA
Static WEP
WPA-PSK
Strongest
WPA2-PSK
WPA2
For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users
do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or
WPA2-PSK.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
81
Chapter 11 Wireless LAN
Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every wireless client in the wireless
network supports. For example, suppose the AP does not have a local user database, and you do
not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no user authentication. Suppose the wireless network
has two wireless clients. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA.
Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network.
Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger
encryption. IEEE 802.1x and WEP encryption are better than none at all, but it is
still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information pretty
quickly.
Note: It is not possible to use WPA-PSK, WPA or stronger encryption with a local user
database. In this case, it is better to set up stronger encryption with no
authentication than to set up weaker encryption with the local user database.
When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your NBG5715, you can also select an option (WPA
Compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some wireless clients support WPA and some
support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network
login) and select the WPA Compatible option in the NBG5715.
Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer
the key, the stronger the encryption. Every wireless client in the wireless network must have the
same key.
WPS
WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS
allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure
security settings manually. Depending on the devices in your network, you can either press a
button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (Personal Identification
Number) in the devices. Then, they connect and set up a secure network by themselves. See how
to set up a secure wireless network using WPS in the Section 9.2 on page 61.
WDS
Wireless Distribution System or WDS security is used between bridged APs. It is independent of the
security between the wired networks and their respective APs. If you do not enable WDS security,
traffic between APs is not encrypted. When WDS security is enabled, both APs must use the same
pre-shared key.
11.2 The General Wireless LAN Screen
Use this screen to configure the SSIDs of the wireless LAN.
Note: If you are configuring the NBG5715 from a computer connected to the wireless LAN
and you change the NBG5715’s SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose
your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change
the wireless settings of your computer to match the NBG5715’s new settings.
82
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Wireless LAN
Click Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G to open the General screen.
Figure 42 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General
The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen.
Table 27 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless LAN
Select Enable to activate the 2.4G and/or 5G wireless LAN. Select Disable to turn
it off.
Name(SSID)
The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless
client is associated. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable characters found
on a typical English language keyboard) for the wireless LAN.
Hide SSID
Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station
cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Channel
Selection
Set the operating frequency/channel depending on your particular region.
Select a channel from the drop-down list box. The options vary depending on the
frequency band and the country you are in.
Refer to the Connection Wizard chapter for more information on channels. This
option is only available if Auto Channel Selection is disabled.
Auto Channel
Selection
Select this check box for the NBG5715 to automatically choose the channel with
the least interference. Deselect this check box if you wish to manually select the
channel using the Channel Section field.
Operating
Channel
This displays the channel the NBG5715 is currently using.
Channel Width
Select the wireless channel width used by NBG5715.
A standard 20 MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 216.7 Mbps whereas a
40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 450 Mbps.
Because not all devices support 40 MHz channels, select Auto 20/40MHz to allow
the NBG5715 to adjust the channel bandwidth automatically.
Select 20 MHz to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your
neighborhood.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
83
Chapter 11 Wireless LAN
Table 27 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Mode
If you are in the Wireless LAN 2.4G > General screen, you can select from the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
802.11b: allows either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices
to associate with the NBG5715. In this mode, all wireless devices can only
transmit at the data rates supported by IEEE 802.11b.
802.11g: allows IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the
Device. IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices can associate with the NBG5715
only when they use the short preamble type.
802.11bg: allows either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the NBG5715. The NBG5715 adjusts the transmission
rate automatically according to the wireless standard supported by the wireless
devices.
802.11n: allows IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the
NBG5715. This can increase transmission rates, although IEEE 802.11b or IEEE
802.11g clients will not be able to connect to the NBG5715. I
802.11gn: allows either IEEE 802.11g or IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the NBG5715. The transmission rate of your
NBG5715 might be reduced.
802.11 bgn: allows IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g and IEEE802.11n compliant
WLAN devices to associate with the NBG5715. The transmission rate of your
NBG5715 might be reduced.
If you are in the Wireless LAN 5G > General screen, you can select from the
following:
•
•
Security Mode
802.11a: allows only IEEE 802.11a compliant WLAN devices to associate with
the NBG5715.
802.11an: allows both IEEE802.11n and IEEE802.11a compliant WLAN devices
to associate with the NBG5715. The transmission rate of your NBG5715 might
be reduced.
Select Static WEP, WPA-PSK, WPA, WPA2-PSK or WPA2 to add security on this
wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must
have same wireless security settings as this device. After you select to use a
security, additional options appears in this screen. See Section 11.3 on page 84 for
detailed information on different security modes. Or you can select No Security to
allow any client to associate this network without authentication.
Note: If the WPS function is enabled (default), only No Security, WPA-PSK and
WPA2-PSK are available in this field.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen.
11.3 Wireless Security Modes
11.3.1 No Security
Select No Security to allow wireless clients to communicate with the access points without any
data encryption.
84
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Wireless LAN
Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG5715, your network is
accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.
Figure 43 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > Security: No Security
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 28 Network > Wireless LAN > Security: No Security
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Mode
Choose No Security from the drop-down list box.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
11.3.2 WEP Encryption
WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points
to keep network communications private. It encrypts unicast and multicast communications in a
network. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key.
Your NBG5715 allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can
be enabled at any one time.
Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list.
Figure 44 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > Security: Static WEP
NBG5715 User’s Guide
85
Chapter 11 Wireless LAN
The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.
Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > Security: Static WEP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Mode
Select Static WEP to enable data encryption.
PassPhrase
Enter a Passphrase (up to 26 printable characters) and click Generate.
A passphrase functions like a password. In WEP security mode, it is further
converted by the NBG5715 into a complicated string that is referred to as the
“key”. This key is requested from all devices wishing to connect to a wireless
network.
WEP Encryption
Select 64-bits or 128-bits.
This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use.
Authentication
Method
Select Auto or Shared Key from the drop-down list box.
This field specifies whether the wireless clients have to provide the WEP key to
login to the wireless client. Keep this setting at Auto unless you want to force a
key verification before communication between the wireless client and the
NBG5715 occurs.
Select Shared Key to force the clients to provide the WEP key prior to
communication.
ASCII
Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key.
Hex
Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key.
The preceding "0x", that identifies a hexadecimal key, is entered automatically.
Key 1 to Key 4
The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the NBG5715 and the wireless
stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission.
If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal
characters ("0-9", "A-F").
If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal
characters ("0-9", "A-F").
You must configure at least one key, only one key can be activated at any one
time. The default key is key 1.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
11.3.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list.
Figure 45 Network > Wireless LAN > Security: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
86
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Wireless LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > Security: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Mode
Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK to enable data encryption.
WPA Compatible
This field appears when you choose WPA2-PSK as the Security Mode.
Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA-PSK security mode to
connect to your NBG5715.
Pre-Shared Key
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK uses a simple common password for authentication.
Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive keyboard characters.
Group Key
Update Timer
The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP sends a new group
key out to all clients.
The default is 3600 seconds (60 minutes).
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
11.3.4 WPA/WPA2
Select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list.
Figure 46 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > General: WPA/WPA2
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA/WPA2
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Mode
Select WPA or WPA2 to enable data encryption.
WPA Compatible
This check box is available only when you select WPA2-PSK or WPA2 in the
Security Mode field.
Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to
communicate with the NBG5715 even when the NBG5715 is using WPA2-PSK
or WPA2.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
87
Chapter 11 Wireless LAN
Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA/WPA2 (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Group Key Update
Timer
The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPAPSK/WPA2-PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using WPA/WPA2
key management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The re-keying
process is the WPA/WPA2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for
an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. Setting of the Group Key
Update Timer is also supported in WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK mode.
PMK Cache Period
This field is available only when you select WPA2.
Specify how often wireless clients have to resend usernames and passwords in
order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between 10 and 999999
minutes.
Note: If wireless client authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the
reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority.
Pre-Authentication
This field is available only when you select WPA2.
Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already
connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP
before connecting to it. Select Enable to turn on preauthentication in WAP2.
Otherwise, select Disable.
Authentication Server
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal
notation.
Port Number
Enter the port number of the external authentication server.
You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you
to do so with additional information.
Shared Secret
Enter a password (up to 127 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared
between the external authentication server and the NBG5715.
The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your
NBG5715. The key is not sent over the network.
Session Timeout
The NBG5715 automatically disconnects a wireless client from the wireless and
wired networks after a period of inactivity. The wireless client needs to send the
username and password again before it can use the wireless and wired
networks again. Some wireless clients may prompt users for a username and
password; other clients may use saved login credentials. In either case, there
is usually a short delay while the wireless client logs in to the wireless network
again.
Enter the time in seconds from 0 to 999999.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Reset
Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
11.4 The MAC Filter Screen
The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the NBG5715 to give exclusive access to devices
(Allow) or exclude devices from accessing the NBG5715 (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a
unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and
consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know
the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen.
88
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Wireless LAN
To change your NBG5715’s MAC filter settings, click Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > MAC
Filter. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 47 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > MAC Filter
The following table describes the labels in this menu.
Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > MAC Filter
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MAC Address
Filter
Select to turn on (Enable) or off (Disable) MAC address filtering.
Filter Action
Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Filter Summary table.
This field is configurable only when you select Enable in the MAC Address Filter
field.
Select Allow to permit access to the NBG5715, MAC addresses not listed will be
denied access to the NBG5715.
Select Deny to block access to the NBG5715, MAC addresses not listed will be
allowed to access the NBG5715.
MAC Filter Summary
Set
This is the index number of the MAC address.
MAC Address
Enter the MAC address of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to
the NBG5715.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
89
Chapter 11 Wireless LAN
11.5 The Wireless LAN Advanced Screen
Use this screen to allow wireless advanced features, such as the output power, RTS/CTS Threshold
and high-throughput physical mode settings.
Click Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > Advanced. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 48 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > Advanced
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS
Threshold
Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS (Request To
Send)/CTS (Clear To Send) handshake.
Fragmentation
Threshold
The threshold (number of bytes) for the fragmentation boundary for directed
messages. It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent.
Intra-BSS Traffic
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless
clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one
access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is
enabled, wireless clients can access the wired network and communicate with
each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless clients can still access the wired
network but cannot communicate with each other.
advance tx
power
Set the output power of the NBG5715 in this field. If there is a high density of APs
in an area, decrease the output power of the NBG5715 to reduce interference with
other APs. Select one of the following 100%, 90%, 75%, 50%, 25% or 10%.
See the product specifications for more information on your NBG5715’s output
power.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
11.6 The QoS Screen
The QoS (Quality of Service) screen allows you to automatically give a service (such as VoIP and
video) a priority level.
90
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Wireless LAN
Click Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > QoS. The following screen appears.
Figure 49 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > QoS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 34 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > QoS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable WMM QoS
Check this to have the NBG5715 automatically give a service a priority level
according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS
(Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video,
which makes them run more smoothly.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
11.7 The WPS Screen
Use this screen to enable/disable WPS, view or generate a new PIN number and check current WPS
status. To open this screen, click Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > WPS tab.
Note: With WPS, wireless clients can only connect to the wireless network using the first
SSID on the NBG5715.
Figure 50 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > WPS
NBG5715 User’s Guide
91
Chapter 11 Wireless LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 35 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > WPS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WPS Setup
WPS
Select Enable to activate the WPS feature. Select Disable to turn it off.
PIN Number
This displays a PIN number last time system generated. Click Generate to
generate a new PIN number.
WPS Status
Status
This displays Configured when the NBG5715 has connected to a wireless
network using WPS or when Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless
security settings have been changed. The current wireless and wireless security
settings also appear in the screen.
This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there are no wireless or
wireless security changes on the NBG5715 or you click Release_Configuration
to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings.
Release
Configuration
This button is only available when the WPS status displays Configured.
802.11 Mode
This is the 802.11 mode used. Only compliant WLAN devices can associate with
the NBG5715.
SSID
This is the name of the wireless network (the NBG5715’s first SSID).
Security
This is the type of wireless security employed by the network.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings
for WPS connections on the NBG5715.
11.8 The WPS Station Screen
Use this screen when you want to add a wireless station using WPS. To open this screen, click
Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > WPS Station tab.
Note: After you click Push Button on this screen, you have to press a similar button in
the wireless station utility within 2 minutes. To add the second wireless station, you
have to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station again after the
first 2 minutes.
Figure 51 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > WPS Station
92
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Wireless LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 36 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > WPS Station
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Push Button
Use this button when you use the PBC (Push Button Configuration) method to
configure wireless stations’s wireless settings. See Section 9.2.1 on page 61.
Click this to start WPS-aware wireless station scanning and the wireless security
information synchronization.
Or input station’s
PIN number
Use this button when you use the PIN Configuration method to configure
wireless station’s wireless settings. See Section 9.2.2 on page 63.
Type the same PIN number generated in the wireless station’s utility. Then click
Start to associate to each other and perform the wireless security information
synchronization.
11.9 The Scheduling Screen
Use this screen to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off. Wireless LAN scheduling is
disabled by default. The wireless LAN can be scheduled to turn on or off on certain days and at
certain times. To open this screen, click Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > Scheduling tab.
Figure 52 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > Scheduling
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 37 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > Scheduling
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless LAN
Scheduling
Select Enable to activate the scheduling feature. Select Disable to turn it off.
Scheduling
WLAN Status
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Select On or Off to specify whether the Wireless LAN is turned on or off. This
field works in conjunction with the Day and For the following times fields.
93
Chapter 11 Wireless LAN
Table 37 Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G > Scheduling (continued)
94
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Day
Select Everyday or the specific days to turn the Wireless LAN on or off. If you
select Everyday you can not select any specific days. This field works in
conjunction with the For the following times field.
Except for the
following times
(24-Hour Format)
Select a begin time using the first set of hour and minute (min) drop down
boxes and select an end time using the second set of hour and minute (min)
drop down boxes. If you have chosen On earlier for the WLAN Status the
Wireless LAN will turn on between the two times you enter in these fields. If you
have chosen Off earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn off
between the two times you enter in these fields.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
12
LAN
12.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings.
A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers are
attached. A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area, usually the same building or
floor of a building. The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server, manage IP
addresses, and partition your physical network into logical networks.
Figure 53 LAN Example
The LAN screens can help you manage IP addresses.
12.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the IP screen to change the IP address for your NBG5715 (Section 12.4 on page 97).
• Use the IP Alias screen to have the NBG5715 apply IP alias to create LAN subnets (Section 12.5
on page 97).
NBG5715 User’s Guide
95
Chapter 12 LAN
12.3 What You Need To Know
The actual physical connection determines whether the NBG5715 ports are LAN or WAN ports.
There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN
network as shown next.
Figure 54 LAN and WAN IP Addresses
The LAN parameters of the NBG5715 are preset in the factory with the following values:
• IP address of 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 (24 bits)
• DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33.
These parameters should work for the majority of installations. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS
server address(es), read the embedded Web Configurator help regarding what fields need to be
configured.
12.3.1 IP Pool Setup
The NBG5715 is pre-configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33 to
192.168.1.64. This configuration leaves 31 IP addresses (excluding the NBG5715 itself) in the
lower range (192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.32) for other server computers, for instance, servers for
mail, FTP, TFTP, web, etc., that you may have.
12.3.2 LAN TCP/IP
The NBG5715 has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to
systems that support DHCP client capability.
96
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 12 LAN
12.4 The LAN IP Screen
Use this screen to change the IP address for your NBG5715. Click Network > LAN > IP.
Figure 55 Network > LAN > IP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 38 Network > LAN > IP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IP Address
Type the IP address of your NBG5715 in dotted decimal notation.
IP Subnet Mask
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your
NBG5715 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address
that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask
computed by the NBG5715.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
12.5 The IP Alias Screen
IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same
Ethernet interface. The NBG5715 supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical
Ethernet interface with the NBG5715 itself as the gateway for each LAN network.
To change your NBG5715’s IP alias settings, click Network > LAN
as shown.
IP Alias. The screen appears
Figure 56 Network > LAN > IP Alias
NBG5715 User’s Guide
97
Chapter 12 LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 Network > LAN > IP Alias
98
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IP Alias 1, 2
Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the NBG5715.
IP Address
Type the IP alias address of your NBG5715 in dotted decimal notation.
IP Subnet Mask
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your
NBG5715 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address
that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask
computed by the NBG5715.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
13
DHCP Server
13.1 Overview
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to
obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the NBG5715’s LAN as a
DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the NBG5715 provides the TCP/IP
configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on
your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured.
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the General screen to enable the DHCP server (Section 13.2 on page 99).
• Use the Advanced screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers
based on their MAC Addresses (Section 13.3 on page 100).
• Use the Client List screen to view the current DHCP client information (Section 13.4 on page
101).
13.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
MAC Addresses
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is
assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example,
00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them
to the DHCP Client List screen.
13.2 The DHCP Server General Screen
Use this screen to enable the DHCP server. Click Network > DHCP Server. The following screen
displays.
Figure 57 Network > DHCP Server > General
NBG5715 User’s Guide
99
Chapter 13 DHCP Server
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 40 Network > DHCP Server > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DHCP Server
Select Enable to activate DHCP for LAN.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132)
allows individual clients (computers) to obtain TCP/IP configuration at
startup from a server. Enable the DHCP server unless your ISP instructs you
to do otherwise. Select Disable to stop the NBG5715 acting as a DHCP
server. When configured as a server, the NBG5715 provides TCP/IP
configuration for the clients. If not, DHCP service is disabled and you must
have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computers must be
manually configured. When set as a server, fill in the following four fields.
IP Pool Starting
Address
This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address
pool for LAN.
Pool Size
This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool for LAN.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
13.3 The DHCP Server Advanced Screen
This screen allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on
their MAC addresses. You can also use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the
NBG5715 sends to the DHCP clients.
To change your NBG5715’s static DHCP settings, click Network > DHCP Server > Advanced. The
following screen displays.
Figure 58 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced
100
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 13 DHCP Server
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 41 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Static DHCP Table
This is the index number of the static IP table entry (row).
MAC Address
Type the MAC address (with colons) of a computer on your LAN.
IP Address
Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN.
DNS Server
DNS Servers
Assigned by DHCP
Server
The NBG5715 passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address (in the
order you specify here) to the DHCP clients. The NBG5715 only passes this
information to the LAN DHCP clients when you select the Enable DHCP Server
check box. When you clear the Enable DHCP Server check box, DHCP service
is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN, or else the
computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured.
First DNS Server
Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and
the NBG5715's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only)
DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns.
Second DNS Server
Third DNS Server
Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the
DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined,
but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after
you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the
same IP address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click
Apply.
Select DNS Relay to have the NBG5715 act as a DNS proxy. The NBG5715's
LAN IP address displays in the field to the right (read-only). The NBG5715 tells
the DHCP clients on the LAN that the NBG5715 itself is the DNS server. When a
computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the NBG5715, the NBG5715
forwards the query to the NBG5715's system DNS server (configured in the
WAN > Internet Connection screen) and relays the response back to the
computer. You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers; if you
select DNS Relay for a second or third DNS server, that choice changes to
None after you click Apply.
Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not
configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order
to access it.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
13.4 The Client List Screen
The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information (including IP Address, Host Name and MAC
Address) of network clients using the NBG5715’s DHCP servers.
Configure this screen to always assign an IP address to a MAC address (and host name). Click
Network > DHCP Server > Client List.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
101
Chapter 13 DHCP Server
Note: You can also view a read-only client list by clicking the DHCP Table (Details...)
hyperlink in the Status screen.
Figure 59 Network > DHCP Server > Client List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 42 Network > DHCP Server > Client List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the index number of the host computer.
Status
This field displays whether the connection to the host computer is up (a yellow bulb)
or down (a gray bulb).
Host Name
This field displays the computer host name.
IP Address
This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
MAC Address
This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Host Name
field.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address which
uniquely identifies a device. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists
of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
102
Reserve
Select this if you want to reserve the IP address for this specific MAC address.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Reset
Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
14
NAT
14.1 Overview
NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in
a packet. For example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network is
changed to a different IP address known within another network.
The figure below is a simple illustration of a NAT network. You want to assign ports 21-25 to one
FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign
a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example).
You assign the LAN IP addresses to the devices (A to D) connected to your NBG5715. The ISP
assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. All traffic
coming from A to D going out to the Internet use the IP address of the NBG5715, which is
192.168.1.1.
Figure 60 NAT Example
A: 192.168.1.33
LAN
FTP, Telnet, SNMP
Ports 21 to 25
WAN
192.168.1.1
B: 192.168.1.34
Port 80
IP address
assigned by ISP
C: 192.168.1.35
This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the NBG5715.
Note: You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up NAT, to allow traffic from
the WAN to be forwarded through the NBG5715.
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the General screen to enable NAT and set a default server (Section 14.2 on page 105).
• Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your
local network (Section 14.3 on page 106).
NBG5715 User’s Guide
103
Chapter 14 NAT
• Use the NAT Advance screen to change your NBG5715’s trigger port settings (Section 14.4 on
page 109).
14.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
Inside/Outside
This denotes where a host is located relative to the NBG5715, for example, the computers of your
subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts.
Global/Local
This denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the
local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the
global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN
side.
Note: Inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP
address of a host used in a packet.
An inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still
in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host
when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information.
Table 43 NAT Definitions
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Inside
This refers to the host on the LAN.
Outside
This refers to the host on the WAN.
Local
This refers to the packet address (source or
destination) as the packet travels on the LAN.
Global
This refers to the packet address (source or
destination) as the packet travels on the WAN.
Note: NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host.
What NAT Does
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside
global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note
that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed.
The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP.
In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local
network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers , NAT
offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your NBG5715 filters out
104
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 14 NAT
all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information
on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT).
How NAT Works
Each packet has two addresses – a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets,
the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global
Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination
address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local)
IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It
replaces the original IP source address in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The
NBG5715 keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can
have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this.
Figure 61 How NAT Works
14.2 The NAT General Screen
Use this screen to enable NAT and set a default server. Click Network > NAT to open the General
screen.
Figure 62 Network > NAT > General
NBG5715 User’s Guide
105
Chapter 14 NAT
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 44 Network > NAT > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Network Address
Translation (NAT)
Network Address Translation (NAT) allows the translation of an Internet protocol
address used within one network (for example a private IP address used in a
local network) to a different IP address known within another network (for
example a public IP address used on the Internet).
Select Enable to activate NAT. Select Disable to turn it off.
Max NAT/Firewall
Session Per User
Specify the highest number of NAT sessions that the NBG5715 will permit a host
to have at one time.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
14.3 The Port Forwarding Screen
Use this screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network and set
a default server. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded,
and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example,
web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or
where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it
might be better to specify a range of port numbers.
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A service request
that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server. If the
default is not defined, the service request is simply discarded.
Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server
processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may
periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any
active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.
Port forwarding allows you to define the local servers to which the incoming services will be
forwarded. To change your NBG5715’s port forwarding settings, click Network > NAT > Port
Forwarding. The screen appears as shown.
Note: If you do not assign a Default Server, the NBG5715 discards all packets received
for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management.
106
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 14 NAT
Refer to Appendix F on page 247 for port numbers commonly used for particular services.
Figure 63 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 45 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Default Server Setup
Default Server
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A
default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port
Forwarding screen. You can decide whether you want to use the default server
or specify a server manually.
Select this to use the default server.
Change to Server
Select this and manually enter the server’s IP address.
Port Forwarding
Service Name
Select a pre-defined service from the drop-down list box. The pre-defined
service port number(s) and protocol will be displayed in the Port Forwarding
Summary section.
Otherwise, select User define to manually enter the port number(s) and select
the IP protocol.
Service Protocol
Select the transport layer protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are
TCP, UDP, or TCP&UDP.
If you have chosen a pre-defined service in the Service Name field, the protocol
will be configured automatically.
Server IP Address
Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here and click Add to add it in
the Port Forwarding Summary section.
Port Forwarding Summary
This is the number of an individual port forwarding server entry.
Status
This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled.
Name
This field displays a name to identify this rule.
Protocol
This is the transport layer protocol used for the service.
Port
This field displays the port number(s).
Server IP Address
This field displays the inside IP address of the server.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to open the edit screen where you can modify an existing
rule.
Click the Remove icon to delete a rule.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
107
Chapter 14 NAT
Table 45 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
14.3.1 Port Forwarding Edit Screen
This screen lets you create or edit a port forwarding rule. Click the Add Port Forward button or a
rule’s Edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen to open the following screen.
Figure 64 NAT > Port Forwarding Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 46 NAT > Port Forwarding Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Port Forwarding
Select Enable to turn on this rule and the requested service can be forwarded to
the host with a specified internal IP address.
Select Disable to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server without
having to delete the entry.
Service Name
Type a name (of up to 31 printable characters) to identify this rule in the first field
next to Service Name. Otherwise, select a predefined service in the second field
next to Service Name. The predefined service name and port number(s) will
display in the Service Name and Port fields.
Protocol
Select the transport layer protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are
TCP, UDP, or TCP&UDP.
If you have chosen a pre-defined service in the Service Name field, the protocol
will be configured automatically.
Port
Type a port number(s) to define the service to be forwarded to the specified
server.
To specify a range of ports, enter a hyphen (-) between the first port and the last
port, such as 10-20.
108
Server IP
Address
Type the IP address of the server on your LAN that receives packets from the
port(s) specified in the Port field.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 14 NAT
14.4 The NAT Advance Screen
To change your NBG5715’s trigger port settings, click Network > NAT > NAT Advance. The
screen appears as shown.
Note: Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port (range) at a time.
Figure 65 Network > NAT > NAT Advance
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 47 Network > NAT > NAT Advance
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Port Triggering Rules
This is the rule index number (read-only).
Name
Type a unique name (up to 15 characters) for identification purposes. All
characters are permitted - including spaces.
Incoming
Incoming is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it
sends out a particular service. The NBG5715 forwards the traffic with this port
(or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service.
Port
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
End Port
Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Trigger
The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the
NBG5715 to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a
server on the WAN.
Port
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
End Port
Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
109
Chapter 14 NAT
14.5 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG5715 features
described in this chapter.
14.5.1 NATPort Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers
A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP,
that you can make accessible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside
network appear as a single machine to the outside world.
Use the Application screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local
network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the
local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web
service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one
server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be
better to specify a range of port numbers.
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A service request
that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server. If the
default is not defined, the service request is simply discarded.
Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server
processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may
periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any
active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.
14.5.2 NAT Port Forwarding Example
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example),
port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a
third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address.
The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.
Figure 66 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
14.5.3 Trigger Port Forwarding
Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on
the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service
(coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN).
110
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 14 NAT
The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to
use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN
computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address.
Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take
turns using the service. The NBG5715 records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic
to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When
the NBG5715's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("incoming"
port), the NBG5715 forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the
request. After that computer’s connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can
use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each
time you want a different LAN computer to use the application.
14.5.4 Trigger Port Forwarding Example
The following is an example of trigger port forwarding.
Figure 67 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example
Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070).
Port 7070 is a “trigger” port and causes the NBG5715 to record Jane’s computer IP address. The
NBG5715 associates Jane's computer IP address with the "incoming" port range of 6970-7170.
The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170.
The NBG5715 forwards the traffic to Jane’s computer IP address.
Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The
NBG5715 times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol), or two hours with TCP/IP
(Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).
14.5.5 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports
Trigger events only happen on data that is going coming from inside the NBG5715 and going to the
outside.
If an application needs a continuous data stream, that port (range) will be tied up so that another
computer on the LAN can’t trigger it.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
111
Chapter 14 NAT
112
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
15
Dynamic DNS
15.1 Overview
Dynamic DNS services let you use a domain name with a dynamic IP address.
15.1.1 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
What is DDNS?
DDNS, or Dynamic DNS, allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many
dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can
also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance
myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an
IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to
call you even if they don't know your IP address.
DynDNS Wildcard
Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same
IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example,
www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.
Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. You
must have a public WAN IP address.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
113
Chapter 15 Dynamic DNS
15.2 The Dynamic DNS Screen
To change your NBG5715’s DDNS, click Network > DDNS. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 68 Dynamic DNS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 48 Dynamic DNS
114
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Dynamic DNS
Select Enable to use dynamic DNS. Select Disable to turn this feature off.
Service Provider
Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider.
Host Name
Enter a host names in the field provided. You can specify up to two host
names in the field separated by a comma (",").
Usename
Enter your user name.
Password
Enter the password assigned to you.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
16
Static Route
16.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your NBG5715.
Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected, and the
NBG5715 has no knowledge of the networks beyond. For instance, the NBG5715 knows about
network N2 in the following figure through remote node Router 1. However, the NBG5715 is unable
to route a packet to network N3 because it doesn't know that there is a route through the same
remote node Router 1 (via gateway Router 2). The static routes are for you to tell the NBG5715
about the networks beyond the remote nodes.
Figure 69 Example of Static Routing Topology
16.2 The Static Route Screen
Click Network > Static Route to open the Static Route screen.
Figure 70 Network > Static Route
NBG5715 User’s Guide
115
Chapter 16 Static Route
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 49 Network > Static Route
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add Static
Route
Click this to create a new rule.
This is the number of an individual static route.
Status
This field indicates whether the rule is active (yellow bulb) or not (gray bulb).
Name
This field displays a name to identify this rule.
Destination
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is
always based on network number.
Subent Mask
This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination.
Gateway
This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the
same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps
forward packets to their destinations.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to open a screen where you can modify an existing rule.
Click the Remove icon to delete a rule from the NBG5715.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
16.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route
Click the Add Static Route button or a rule’s Edit icon in the Static Route screen. Use this screen
to configure the required information for a static route.
Figure 71 Static Route: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 50 Static Route: Add/Edit
LABEL
116
DESCRIPTION
Static Route
Select to enable or disable this rule.
Route Name
Type a name to identify this rule. You can use up to 20 printable English keyboard
characters, including spaces.
Destination IP
Address
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing
is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single
host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the
network number to be identical to the host ID.
IP Subnet Mask
Enter the IP subnet mask here.
Gateway IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch
on the same segment as your NBG5715's interface(s). The gateway helps forward
packets to their destinations.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 16 Static Route
Table 50 Static Route: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
117
Chapter 16 Static Route
118
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
17
Firewall
17.1 Overview
Use these screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your NBG5715 and your LAN
from unwanted or malicious traffic.
Enable the firewall to protect your LAN computers from attacks by hackers on the Internet and
control access between the LAN and WAN. By default the firewall:
• allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all of the networks.
• blocks traffic that originates on the other networks from going to the LAN.
The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant
Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2).
However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4).
Figure 72 Default Firewall Action
WAN
LAN
17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the General screen to enable or disable the NBG5715’s firewall (Section 17.2 on page 121).
• Use the Services screen enable service blocking, enter/delete/modify the services you want to
block and the date/time you want to block them (Section 17.3 on page 121).
17.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
119
Chapter 17 Firewall
What is a Firewall?
Originally, the term “firewall” referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the spread of
fire from one room to another. The networking term "firewall" is a system or group of systems that
enforces an access-control policy between two networks. It may also be defined as a mechanism
used to protect a trusted network from a network that is not trusted. Of course, firewalls cannot
solve every security problem. A firewall is one of the mechanisms used to establish a network
security perimeter in support of a network security policy. It should never be the only mechanism or
method employed. For a firewall to guard effectively, you must design and deploy it appropriately.
This requires integrating the firewall into a broad information-security policy. In addition, specific
policies must be implemented within the firewall itself.
Stateful Inspection Firewall
Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access rules.
They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol. They also "inspect" the
session data to assure the integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols. These
firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency; however, they may lack the granular
application level access control or caching that some proxies support. Firewalls, of one type or
another, have become an integral part of standard security solutions for enterprises.
About the NBG5715 Firewall
The NBG5715’s firewall feature physically separates the LAN and the WAN and acts as a secure
gateway for all data passing between the networks.
It is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when
activated (click the General tab under Firewall and then click the Enable Firewall check box).
The NBG5715's purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network (LAN) to be securely connected to
the Internet. The NBG5715 can be used to prevent theft, destruction and modification of data, as
well as log events, which may be important to the security of your network.
The NBG5715 is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet.
This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN.
The NBG5715 has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports, which are used to physically
separate the network into two areas.The WAN (Wide Area Network) port attaches to the broadband
(cable or DSL) modem to the Internet.
The LAN (Local Area Network) port attaches to a network of computers, which needs security from
the outside world. These computers will have access to Internet services such as e-mail, FTP and
the World Wide Web. However, "inbound access" is not allowed (by default) unless the remote host
is authorized to use a specific service.
Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall
120
Change the default password via Web Configurator.
Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way, including attaching a
modem to the port.
Limit who can access your router.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Firewall
Don't enable any local service (such as NTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could present
a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the
enabled services to access the firewall or the network.
For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to
communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the
services at specific interfaces.
Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active.
Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room.
17.2 The Firewall General Screen
Use this screen to enable or disable the NBG5715’s firewall, and set up firewall logs. Click Security
> Firewall to open the General screen.
Figure 73 Security > Firewall > General l
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 51 Security > Firewall > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable Firewall
Select this check box to activate the firewall. The NBG5715 performs access
control and protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is
activated.
Apply
Click Apply to save the settings.
Reset
Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
17.3 The Firewall Services Screen
If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your NBG5715, an ICMP response
packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the NBG5715 exists. Use this
screen to prevent the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering
your NBG5715 when unsupported ports are probed.
You can also use this screen to enable service blocking, enter/delete/modify the services you want
to block and the date/time you want to block them.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
121
Chapter 17 Firewall
Click Security > Firewall > Services. The screen appears as shown next.
Figure 74 Security > Firewall > Services l
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 52 Security > Firewall > Services
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error-reporting
protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses
Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP
software and directly apparent to the application user.
Respond to Ping
on
The NBG5715 will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is
selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select WAN to
reply to incoming WAN Ping requests. Otherwise select LAN & WAN to reply to
all incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests.
Apply
Click Apply to save the settings.
Enable Firewall Rule
Enable Firewall
Rule
Select this check box to activate the firewall rules that you define (see Add
Firewall Rule below).
Apply
Click Apply to save the settings.
Add Firewall Rule
Service Name
Enter a name that identifies or describes the firewall rule.
MAC Address
Enter the MAC address of the computer for which the firewall rule applies.
Dest IP Address
Enter the IP address of the computer to which traffic for the application or
service is entering.
The NBG5715 applies the firewall rule to traffic initiating from this computer.
122
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Firewall
Table 52 Security > Firewall > Services (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Source IP Address
Enter the IP address of the computer that initializes traffic for the application or
service.
The NBG5715 applies the firewall rule to traffic initiating from this computer.
Protocol
Select the protocol (ALL,TCP, UDP or BOTH) used to transport the packets for
which you want to apply the firewall rule.
Dest Port Range
Enter the port number/range of the destination that define the traffic type, for
example TCP port 80 defines web traffic.
Source Port
Range
Enter the port number/range of the source that define the traffic type, for
example TCP port 80 defines web traffic.
Add Rule
Click Add to save the firewall rule.
Firewall Rule
This is your firewall rule number. The ordering of your rules is important as rules
are applied in turn.
Service Name
This is a name that identifies or describes the firewall rule.
MAC address
This is the MAC address of the computer for which the firewall rule applies.
Dest IP
This is the IP address of the computer to which traffic for the application or
service is entering.
Source IP
This is the IP address of the computer from which traffic for the application or
service is initialized.
Protocol
This is the protocol (ALL,TCP, UDP or BOTH) used to transport the packets for
which you want to apply the firewall rule.
Dest Port Range
This is the port number/range of the destination that define the traffic type, for
example TCP port 80 defines web traffic.
Source Port
Range
This is the port number/range of the source that define the traffic type, for
example TCP port 80 defines web traffic.
Action
DROP - Traffic matching the conditions of the firewall rule are stopped.
Delete
Click Delete to remove the firewall rule.
Reset
Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
See Appendix F on page 247 for commonly used services and port numbers.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
123
CHAPTER
18
IPSec VPN
18.1 Overview
A virtual private network (VPN) provides secure communications between sites without the expense
of leased site-to-site lines. A secure VPN is a combination of tunneling, encryption, authentication,
access control and auditing. It is used to transport traffic over the Internet or any insecure network
that uses TCP/IP for communication.
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) is a standards-based VPN that offers flexible solutions for secure
data communications across a public network like the Internet. IPSec is built around a number of
standardized cryptographic techniques to provide confidentiality, data integrity and authentication
at the IP layer.
The following figure provides one perspective of a VPN tunnel.
Figure 75 IPSec VPN: Overview
VPN Tunnel
The VPN tunnel connects the NBG5715 (X) and the remote IPSec router (Y). These routers then
connect the local network (A) and remote network (B).
18.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the General screen to display and manage the NBG5715’s VPN rules (tunnels) (Section 18.4
on page 126).
• Use the SA Monitor screen to display and manage active VPN connections (Section 18.6 on page
139).
NBG5715 User’s Guide
124
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
18.3 What You Need To Know
A VPN tunnel is usually established in two phases. Each phase establishes a security association
(SA), a contract indicating what security parameters the NBG5715 and the remote IPSec router will
use.
The first phase establishes an Internet Key Exchange (IKE) SA between the NBG5715 and remote
IPSec router. The second phase uses the IKE SA to securely establish an IPSec SA through which
the NBG5715 and remote IPSec router can send data between computers on the local network and
remote network. The following figure illustrates this.
Figure 76 VPN: IKE SA and IPSec SA
IPSec SA
IKE SA
In this example, a computer in network A is exchanging data with a computer in network B. Inside
networks A and B, the data is transmitted the same way data is normally transmitted in the
networks. Between routers X and Y, the data is protected by tunneling, encryption, authentication,
and other security features of the IPSec SA. The IPSec SA is established securely using the IKE SA
that routers X and Y established first.
18.3.1 IKE SA (IKE Phase 1) Overview
The IKE SA provides a secure connection between the NBG5715 and remote IPSec router.
It takes several steps to establish an IKE SA. The negotiation mode determines the number of steps
to use. There are two negotiation modes--main mode and aggressive mode. Main mode provides
better security, while aggressive mode is faster.
Both routers must use the same negotiation mode.
These modes are discussed in more detail in Section 18.7.4 on page 142. Main mode is used in
various examples in the rest of this section.
IP Addresses of the NBG5715 and Remote IPSec Router
In the NBG5715, you have to specify the IP addresses of the NBG5715 and the remote IPSec router
to establish an IKE SA.
You can usually provide a static IP address or a domain name for the NBG5715. Sometimes, your
NBG5715 might also offer another alternative, such as using the IP address of a port or interface.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
125
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
You can usually provide a static IP address or a domain name for the remote IPSec router as well.
Sometimes, you might not know the IP address of the remote IPSec router (for example,
telecommuters). In this case, you can still set up the IKE SA, but only the remote IPSec router can
initiate an IKE SA.
18.3.2 IPSec SA (IKE Phase 2) Overview
Once the NBG5715 and remote IPSec router have established the IKE SA, they can securely
negotiate an IPSec SA through which to send data between computers on the networks.
Note: The IPSec SA stays connected even if the underlying IKE SA is not available
anymore.
Local Network and Remote Network
In an IPSec SA, the local network consists of devices connected to the NBG5715 and may be called
the local policy. Similarly, the remote network consists of the devices connected to the remote
IPSec router and may be called the remote policy.
Note: It is not recommended to set a VPN rule’s local and remote network settings both
to 0.0.0.0 (any). This causes the NBG5715 to try to forward all access attempts (to
the local network, the Internet or even the NBG5715) to the remote IPSec router.
In this case, you can no longer manage the NBG5715.
18.4 The General Screen
The following figure helps explain the main fields in the web configurator.
Figure 77 IPSec Fields Summary
Remote Network
Local Network
Remote
IPSec Router
VPN Tunnel
Local IP Address
Remote IP Address
Local and remote IP addresses must be static.
126
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
Click Security > IPSec VPN to display the Summary screen. This is a read-only menu of your
VPN rules (tunnels). Edit a VPN rule by clicking the Edit icon.
Figure 78 Security > IPSec VPN > General
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 53 Security > IPSec VPN > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the VPN policy index number.
Status
This field displays whether the VPN policy is active or not.
This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled.
Local Addr.
This displays the beginning and ending (static) IP addresses or a (static) IP
address and a subnet mask of computer(s) on your local network behind your
NBG5715.
Remote Addr.
This displays the beginning and ending (static) IP addresses or a (static) IP
address and a subnet mask of computer(s) on the remote network behind the
remote IPSec router.
This field displays 0.0.0.0 when the Secure Gateway Address field
displays 0.0.0.0. In this case only the remote IPSec router can initiate
the VPN.
Encap.
This field displays Tunnel or Transport mode (Tunnel is the default selection).
Algorithm
This field displays the security protocol, encryption algorithm and authentication
algorithm used for an SA.
Gateway
This is the static WAN IP address or URL of the remote IPSec router. This field
displays 0.0.0.0 when you configure the Secure Gateway Address field
in the Rule Setup screen to 0.0.0.0.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the VPN rule.
Click the Remove icon to remove an existing VPN rule.
Allow Through
IPSec Tunnel
Select this check box to send NetBIOS packets through the VPN connection.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
127
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
18.5 Edit VPN Rule
Click on a policy’s Edit icon in the IPSec VPN > General screen to edit the VPN policy.
Note: The NBG5715 uses the system default gateway interface¡¦s WAN IP address as its
WAN IP address to set up a VPN tunnel.
128
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
18.5.1 IKEKey Setup
IKEprovides more protection so it is generally recommended. You only configure VPN manual key
when you select IKE in the IPSec Keying Mode field on the IPSec VPN > General > Edit
screen.
Figure 79 Security > IPSec VPN > General > Edit: IKE
NBG5715 User’s Guide
129
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 54 Security > IPSec VPN > General > Edit: IKE
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Property
Propert
Select Enable to activate this VPN policy.
Keep Alive
Select this check box to have the NBG5715 automatically reinitiate the SA after
the SA lifetime times out, even if there is no traffic. The remote IPSec router
must also have keep alive enabled in order for this feature to work.
NAT Traversal
Select this check box to enable NAT traversal. NAT traversal allows you to set up
a VPN connection when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers.
The remote IPSec router must also have NAT traversal enabled.
You can use NAT traversal with ESP protocol using Transport or Tunnel mode,
but not with AH protocol nor with manual key management. In order for an
IPSec router behind a NAT router to receive an initiating IPSec packet, set the
NAT router to forward UDP ports 500 and 4500 to the IPSec router behind the
NAT router.
IPSec Keying
Mode
Select IKE from the drop-down list box. IKE provides more protection so it is
generally recommended.
DNS Server (for
IPSec VPN)
If there is a private DNS server that services the VPN, type its IP address here.
The NBG5715 assigns this additional DNS server to the NBG5715's DHCP clients
that have IP addresses in this IPSec rule's range of local addresses.
A DNS server allows clients on the VPN to find other computers and servers on
the VPN by their (private) domain names.
Local Policy
Local IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router's
configured remote IP addresses.
Two active SAs can have the same configured local or remote IP address, but
not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP
addresses, as long as only one is active at any time.
In order to have more than one active rule with the Secure Gateway
Address field set to 0.0.0.0, the ranges of the local IP addresses
cannot overlap between rules.
If you configure an active rule with 0.0.0.0 in the Secure Gateway
Address field and the LAN’s full IP address range as the local IP
address, then you cannot configure any other active rules with the
Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0.
Local Address
For a single IP address, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your
NBG5715.
For a specific range of IP addresses, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a
range of computers on your LAN behind your NBG5715.
To specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask, enter a (static) IP
address on the LAN behind your NBG5715.
Local Address End
/Mask
When the local IP address is a single address, type it a second time here.
When the local IP address is a range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a
range of computers on the LAN behind your NBG5715.
When the local IP address is a subnet address, enter a subnet mask on the LAN
behind your NBG5715.
130
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
Table 54 Security > IPSec VPN > General > Edit: IKE (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Remote Policy
Remote IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec
router's configured local IP addresses. The remote fields do not apply when
the Secure Gateway IP Address field is configured to 0.0.0.0. In
this case only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN.
Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address(es) both the same.
Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You
can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as
long as only one is active at any time.
Remote Address
Start
For a single IP address, enter a (static) IP address on the network behind the
remote IPSec router.
For a specific range of IP addresses, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a
range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router.
To specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask, enter a (static) IP
address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.
Remote Address
End /Mask
When the remote IP address is a single address, type it a second time here.
When the remote IP address is a range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a
range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router.
When the remote IP address is a subnet address, enter a subnet mask on the
network behind the remote IPSec router.
Authentication Method
My IP Address
Enter the NBG5715's static WAN IP address (if it has one) or leave the field set
to 0.0.0.0.
The NBG5715 uses its current WAN IP address (static or dynamic) in setting up
the VPN tunnel if you leave this field as 0.0.0.0. If the WAN connection goes
down, the NBG5715 uses the dial backup IP address for the VPN tunnel when
using dial backup or the LAN IP address when using traffic redirect.
Otherwise, you can enter one of the dynamic domain names that you have
configured (in the DDNS screen) to have the NBG5715 use that dynamic
domain name's IP address.
The VPN tunnel has to be rebuilt if My IP Address changes after setup.
Local ID Type
Select IP to identify this NBG5715 by its IP address.
Select Domain Name to identify this NBG5715 by a domain name.
Select E-mail to identify this NBG5715 by an e-mail address.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
131
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
Table 54 Security > IPSec VPN > General > Edit: IKE (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Local Content
When you select IP in the Local ID Type field, type the IP address of your
computer in the Local Content field. The NBG5715 automatically uses the IP
address in the My IP Address field (refer to the My IP Address field
description) if you configure the Local Content field to 0.0.0.0 or leave it
blank.
It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0.0.0.0 in the Local
Content field or use the Domain Name or E-mail ID type in the following
situations.
When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers.
When you want the remote IPSec router to be able to distinguish between VPN
connection requests that come in from IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP
addresses.
When you select Domain Name or E-mail in the Local ID Type field, type a
domain name or e-mail address by which to identify this NBG5715 in the Local
Content field. Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces, although trailing
spaces are truncated. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification
purposes only and can be any string.
Secure Gateway
Address
Type the WAN IP address or the domain name (up to 31 characters) of the
IPSec router with which you're making the VPN connection. Set this field to
0.0.0.0 if the remote IPSec router has a dynamic WAN IP address (the
IPSec Keying Mode field must be set to IKE).
In order to have more than one active rule with the Secure Gateway
Address field set to 0.0.0.0, the ranges of the local IP addresses
cannot overlap between rules.
If you configure an active rule with 0.0.0.0 in the Secure Gateway
Address field and the LAN’s full IP address range as the local IP
address, then you cannot configure any other active rules with the
Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0.
You can also enter a remote secure gateway’s domain name in the
Secure Gateway Address field if the remote secure gateway has
a dynamic WAN IP address and is using DDNS. The NBG5715
has to rebuild the VPN tunnel each time the remote secure
gateway’s WAN IP address changes (there may be a delay until
the DDNS servers are updated with the remote gateway’s new
WAN IP address).
Peer ID Type
Select IP to identify the remote IPSec router by its IP address.
Select Domain Name to identify the remote IPSec router by a domain name.
Select E-mail to identify the remote IPSec router by an e-mail address.
132
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
Table 54 Security > IPSec VPN > General > Edit: IKE (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Peer Content
The configuration of the peer content depends on the peer ID type.
For IP, type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN
connection. If you configure this field to 0.0.0.0 or leave it blank, the NBG5715
will use the address in the Secure Gateway Address field (refer to the Secure
Gateway Address field description).
For Domain Name or E-mail, type a domain name or e-mail address by which
to identify the remote IPSec router. Use up to 31 ASCII characters including
spaces, although trailing spaces are truncated. The domain name or e-mail
address is for identification purposes only and can be any string.
It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0.0.0.0 or use the
Domain Name or E-mail ID type in the following situations:
When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers.
When you want the NBG5715 to distinguish between VPN connection requests
that come in from remote IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses.
IPSec Algorithm
Phase 1
Pre-Shared
Key
Type your pre-shared key in this field. A pre-shared key identifies a
communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. It is called "pre-shared"
because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate
with them over a secure connection.
Type from 8 to 31 case-sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to 62 hexadecimal
("0-9", "A-F") characters. You must precede a hexadecimal key with a "0x”
(zero x), which is not counted as part of the 16 to 62 character range for the
key. For example, in "0x0123456789ABCDEF", “0x” denotes that the key is
hexadecimal and “0123456789ABCDEF” is the key itself.
Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same pre-shared key. You will receive
a “PYLD_MALFORMED” (payload malformed) packet if the same pre-shared key
is not used on both ends.
Mode
Select Main or Aggressive from the drop-down list box. Multiple SAs
connecting through a secure gateway must have the same negotiation mode.
Encryption
Algorithm
Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use for data communications.
Choices are:
DES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm
3DES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm
The NBG5715 and the remote IPSec router must use the same algorithms and
key , which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and
verify a message authentication code. Longer keys require more processing
power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput.
Authentication
Algorithm
Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data. Choices are
SHA1 and MD5. SHA1 is generally considered stronger than MD5, but it is also
slower.
SA Life Time
Define the length of time before an IKE or IPSec SA automatically renegotiates
in this field. It may range from 1 to 2,000,000,000 seconds.
A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to
update the encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN
tunnel renegotiates, all users accessing remote resources are temporarily
disconnected.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
133
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
Table 54 Security > IPSec VPN > General > Edit: IKE (continued)
LABEL
Key Group
DESCRIPTION
You must choose a key group for phase 1 IKE setup. DH1 refers to DiffieHellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number. DH2 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group
2 a 1024 bit (1Kb) random number.
Phase 2
Encapsulation
Mode
Select Tunnel mode or Transport mode from the drop-down list box.
IPSec Protocol
Select the security protocols used for an SA.
Both AH and ESP increase processing requirements and communications
latency (delay).
If you select ESP here, you must select options from the Encryption
Algorithm and Authentication Algorithm fields (described below).
Encryption
Algorithm
Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use for data communications.
Choices are:
DES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm
3DES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm
The NBG5715 and the remote IPSec router must use the same algorithms and
key , which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and
verify a message authentication code. Longer keys require more processing
power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput.
Authentication
Algorithm
Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data. Choices are
SHA1 and MD5. SHA1 is generally considered stronger than MD5, but it is also
slower.
SA Life Time
Define the length of time before an IKE or IPSec SA automatically renegotiates
in this field. It may range from 1 to 2,000,000,000 seconds.
A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to
update the encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN
tunnel renegotiates, all users accessing remote resources are temporarily
disconnected.
Key Group
You must choose a key group for phase 1 IKE setup. DH1 refers to DiffieHellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number. DH2 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group
2 a 1024 bit (1Kb) random number.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previous settings.
18.5.2 Manual Key Setup
Manual key management is useful if you have problems with IKE key management.
18.5.2.1 Security Parameter Index (SPI)
An SPI is used to distinguish different SAs terminating at the same destination and using the same
IPSec protocol. This data allows for the multiplexing of SAs to a single gateway. The SPI (Security
Parameter Index) along with a destination IP address uniquely identify a particular Security
Association (SA). The SPI is transmitted from the remote VPN gateway to the local VPN gateway.
The local VPN gateway then uses the network, encryption and key values that the administrator
associated with the SPI to establish the tunnel.
134
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
Current ZyXEL implementation assumes identical outgoing and incoming SPIs.
18.5.2.2 IPSec SA Using Manual Keys
You might set up an IPSec SA using manual keys when you want to establish a VPN tunnel quickly,
for example, for troubleshooting. You should only do this as a temporary solution, however,
because it is not as secure as a regular IPSec SA.
In IPSec SAs using manual keys, the NBG5715 and remote IPSec router do not establish an IKE SA.
They only establish an IPSec SA. As a result, an IPSec SA using manual keys has some
characteristics of IKE SA and some characteristics of IPSec SA. There are also some differences
between IPSec SA using manual keys and other types of SA.
18.5.2.3 IPSec SA Proposal Using Manual Keys
In IPSec SA using manual keys, you can only specify one encryption algorithm and one
authentication algorithm. There is no DH key exchange, so you have to provide the encryption key
and the authentication key the NBG5715 and remote IPSec router use.
Note: The NBG5715 and remote IPSec router must use the same encryption key and
authentication key.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
135
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
18.5.3 Configuring Manual Key
You only configure VPN manual key when you select Manual in the IPSec Keying Mode field on
the IPSec VPN > General > Edit screen.
Figure 80 Security > IPSec VPN > General > Edit: Manual
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 55 Security > IPSec VPN > General > Edit: Manual
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Property
Property
Select Enable to activate this VPN policy.
IPSec Keying
Mode
Select Manual from the drop-down list box. Manual is a useful option for
troubleshooting if you have problems using IKE key management.
DNS Server (for
IPSec VPN)
If there is a private DNS server that services the VPN, type its IP address here.
The NBG5715 assigns this additional DNS server to the NBG5715's DHCP clients
that have IP addresses in this IPSec rule's range of local addresses.
A DNS server allows clients on the VPN to find other computers and servers on
the VPN by their (private) domain names.
136
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
Table 55 Security > IPSec VPN > General > Edit: Manual (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Local Policy
Local IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router's
configured remote IP addresses.
Two active SAs can have the same configured local or remote IP address, but not
both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP
addresses, as long as only one is active at any time.
In order to have more than one active rule with the Secure Gateway
Address field set to 0.0.0.0, the ranges of the local IP addresses
cannot overlap between rules.
If you configure an active rule with 0.0.0.0 in the Secure Gateway
Address field and the LAN’s full IP address range as the local IP
address, then you cannot configure any other active rules with the
Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0.
Local Address
For a single IP address, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your
NBG5715.
For a specific range of IP addresses, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a
range of computers on your LAN behind your NBG5715.
To specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask, enter a (static) IP
address on the LAN behind your NBG5715.
Local Address
End /Mask
When the local IP address is a single address, type it a second time here.
When the local IP address is a range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a
range of computers on the LAN behind your NBG5715.
When the local IP address is a subnet address, enter a subnet mask on the LAN
behind your NBG5715.
Remote Policy
Remote IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router's
configured local IP addresses. The remote fields do not apply when the
Secure Gateway IP Address field is configured to 0.0.0.0. In this
case only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN.
Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address(es) both the same.
Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You
can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as
long as only one is active at any time.
Remote Address
Start
For a single IP address, enter a (static) IP address on the network behind the
remote IPSec router.
For a specific range of IP addresses, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a
range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router.
To specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask, enter a (static) IP
address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.
Remote Address
End /Mask
When the remote IP address is a single address, type it a second time here.
When the remote IP address is a range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a
range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router.
When the remote IP address is a subnet address, enter a subnet mask on the
network behind the remote IPSec router.
Authentication Method
NBG5715 User’s Guide
137
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
Table 55 Security > IPSec VPN > General > Edit: Manual (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
My IP Address
Enter the NBG5715's static WAN IP address (if it has one) or leave the field set to
0.0.0.0.
The NBG5715 uses its current WAN IP address (static or dynamic) in setting up
the VPN tunnel if you leave this field as 0.0.0.0. If the WAN connection goes
down, the NBG5715 uses the dial backup IP address for the VPN tunnel when
using dial backup or the LAN IP address when using traffic redirect.
Otherwise, you can enter one of the dynamic domain names that you have
configured (in the DDNS screen) to have the NBG5715 use that dynamic domain
name's IP address.
The VPN tunnel has to be rebuilt if My IP Address changes after setup.
Secure Gateway
Address
Type the WAN IP address or the domain name (up to 31 characters) of the IPSec
router with which you're making the VPN connection. Set this field to 0.0.0.0
if the remote IPSec router has a dynamic WAN IP address (the IPSec
Keying Mode field must be set to IKE).
In order to have more than one active rule with the Secure Gateway
Address field set to 0.0.0.0, the ranges of the local IP addresses
cannot overlap between rules.
If you configure an active rule with 0.0.0.0 in the Secure Gateway
Address field and the LAN’s full IP address range as the local IP
address, then you cannot configure any other active rules with the
Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0.
You can also enter a remote secure gateway’s domain name in the
Secure Gateway Address field if the remote secure gateway has
a dynamic WAN IP address and is using DDNS. The NBG5715 has
to rebuild the VPN tunnel each time the remote secure gateway’s
WAN IP address changes (there may be a delay until the DDNS
servers are updated with the remote gateway’s new WAN IP
address).
IPSec Algorithm
SPI
Type a unique SPI (Security Parameter Index) from one to four characters long.
Valid Characters are "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9".
Encryption
Algorithm
Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA. Choices are:
DES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm
3DES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm
The NBG5715 and the remote IPSec router must use the same algorithms and
keys. Longer keys require more processing power, resulting in increased latency
and decreased throughput.
Encryption Key
This field is applicable when you select ESP in the IPSec Protocol field above.
With DES, type a unique key 8 characters long. With 3DES, type a unique key
24 characters long. Any characters may be used, including spaces, but trailing
spaces are truncated.
138
Authentication
Algorithm
Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data in the IPSec SA.
Choices are SHA1 and MD5. SHA1 is generally considered stronger than MD5,
but it is also slower.
Authentication
Key
Type a unique authentication key to be used by IPSec if applicable. Enter 16
characters for MD5 authentication or 20 characters for SHA-1 authentication.
Any characters may be used, including spaces, but trailing spaces are truncated.
Encapsulation
Mode
Select Tunnel mode or Transport mode from the drop-down list box.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
Table 55 Security > IPSec VPN > General > Edit: Manual (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IPSec Protocol
Select the security protocols used for an SA.
Both AH and ESP increase processing requirements and communications latency
(delay).
If you select ESP here, you must select options from the Encryption Algorithm
and Authentication Algorithm fields (described below).
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previous settings.
18.6 The SA Monitor Screen
In the Web Configurator, click Security > IPSec VPN > SA Monitor. Use this screen to display
and manage active VPN connections.
A Security Association (SA) is the group of security settings related to a specific VPN tunnel. This
screen displays active VPN connections. Use Refresh to display active VPN connections.
Figure 81 Security > IPSec VPN > SA Monitor
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 56 Security > VPN > SA Monitor
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Status
This field displays whether the VPN connection is up (yellow bulb) or down
(gray bulb).
Connection Name
This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy.
Remote Gateway
This is the static WAN IP address or URL of the remote IPSec router.
Local Address
This is the IP address of computer(s) on your local network behind your
NBG5715.
Remote Address
This is the IP address of computer(s) on the remote network behind the remote
IPSec router.
Refresh
Click Refresh to display the current active VPN connection(s).
18.7 Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
chapter.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
139
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
18.7.1 IPSec Architecture
The overall IPSec architecture is shown as follows.
Figure 82 IPSec Architecture
IPSec Algorithms
The ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) Protocol (RFC 2406) and AH (Authentication Header)
protocol (RFC 2402) describe the packet formats and the default standards for packet structure
(including implementation algorithms).
The Encryption Algorithm describes the use of encryption techniques such as DES (Data Encryption
Standard) and Triple DES algorithms.
The Authentication Algorithms, HMAC-MD5 (RFC 2403) and HMAC-SHA-1 (RFC 2404, provide an
authentication mechanism for the AH and ESP protocols.
Key Management
Key management allows you to determine whether to use IKE (ISAKMP) or manual key
configuration in order to set up a VPN.
140
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
18.7.2 Encapsulation
The two modes of operation for IPSec VPNs are Transport mode and Tunnel mode. At the time of
writing, the NBG5715 supports Tunnel mode only.
Figure 83 Transport and Tunnel Mode IPSec Encapsulation
Transport Mode
Transport mode is used to protect upper layer protocols and only affects the data in the IP packet.
In Transport mode, the IP packet contains the security protocol (AH or ESP) located after the
original IP header and options, but before any upper layer protocols contained in the packet (such
as TCP and UDP).
With ESP, protection is applied only to the upper layer protocols contained in the packet. The IP
header information and options are not used in the authentication process. Therefore, the
originating IP address cannot be verified for integrity against the data.
With the use of AH as the security protocol, protection is extended forward into the IP header to
verify the integrity of the entire packet by use of portions of the original IP header in the hashing
process.
Tunnel Mode
Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire IP packet to transmit it securely. A Tunnel mode is required
for gateway services to provide access to internal systems. Tunnel mode is fundamentally an IP
tunnel with authentication and encryption. This is the most common mode of operation. Tunnel
mode is required for gateway to gateway and host to gateway communications. Tunnel mode
communications have two sets of IP headers:
• Outside header: The outside IP header contains the destination IP address of the VPN gateway.
• Inside header: The inside IP header contains the destination IP address of the final system
behind the VPN gateway. The security protocol appears after the outer IP header and before the
inside IP header.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
141
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
18.7.3 IKE Phases
There are two phases to every IKE (Internet Key Exchange) negotiation – phase 1 (Authentication)
and phase 2 (Key Exchange). A phase 1 exchange establishes an IKE SA and the second one uses
that SA to negotiate SAs for IPSec.
Figure 84 Two Phases to Set Up the IPSec SA
In phase 1 you must:
• Choose a negotiation mode.
• Authenticate the connection by entering a pre-shared key.
• Choose an encryption algorithm.
• Choose an authentication algorithm.
• Choose a Diffie-Hellman public-key cryptography key group (DH1 or DH2).
• Set the IKE SA lifetime. This field allows you to determine how long an IKE SA should stay up
before it times out. An IKE SA times out when the IKE SA lifetime period expires. If an IKE SA
times out when an IPSec SA is already established, the IPSec SA stays connected.
In phase 2 you must:
• Choose an encryption algorithm.
• Choose an authentication algorithm
• Choose a Diffie-Hellman public-key cryptography key group.
• Set the IPSec SA lifetime. This field allows you to determine how long the IPSec SA should stay
up before it times out. The NBG5715 automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if there is traffic
when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires. If an IPSec SA times out, then the IPSec router must
renegotiate the SA the next time someone attempts to send traffic.
18.7.4 Negotiation Mode
The phase 1 Negotiation Mode you select determines how the Security Association (SA) will be
established for each connection through IKE negotiations.
142
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
• Main Mode ensures the highest level of security when the communicating parties are
negotiating authentication (phase 1). It uses 6 messages in three round trips: SA negotiation,
Diffie-Hellman exchange and an exchange of nonces (a nonce is a random number). This mode
features identity protection (your identity is not revealed in the negotiation).
• Aggressive Mode is quicker than Main Mode because it eliminates several steps when the
communicating parties are negotiating authentication (phase 1). However the trade-off is that
faster speed limits its negotiating power and it also does not provide identity protection. It is
useful in remote access situations where the address of the initiator is not know by the responder
and both parties want to use pre-shared key authentication.
18.7.5 IPSec and NAT
Read this section if you are running IPSec on a host computer behind the NBG5715.
NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both Transport and Tunnel mode. An IPSec VPN using
the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet, both data payload and headers, with a hash
value appended to the packet. When using AH protocol, packet contents (the data payload) are not
encrypted.
A NAT device in between the IPSec endpoints will rewrite either the source or destination address
with one of its own choosing. The VPN device at the receiving end will verify the integrity of the
incoming packet by computing its own hash value, and complain that the hash value appended to
the received packet doesn't match. The VPN device at the receiving end doesn't know about the
NAT in the middle, so it assumes that the data has been maliciously altered.
IPSec using ESP in Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire original packet (including headers) in a
new IP packet. The new IP packet's source address is the outbound address of the sending VPN
gateway, and its destination address is the inbound address of the VPN device at the receiving end.
When using ESP protocol with authentication, the packet contents (in this case, the entire original
packet) are encrypted. The encrypted contents, but not the new headers, are signed with a hash
value appended to the packet.
Tunnel mode ESP with authentication is compatible with NAT because integrity checks are
performed over the combination of the "original header plus original payload," which is unchanged
by a NAT device.
Transport mode ESP with authentication is not compatible with NAT.
Table 57 VPN and NAT
SECURITY PROTOCOL
MODE
NAT
AH
Transport
AH
Tunnel
ESP
Transport
ESP
Tunnel
18.7.6 VPN, NAT, and NAT Traversal
NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both transport and tunnel mode. An IPSec VPN using
the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet, both data payload and headers, with a hash
value appended to the packet, but a NAT device between the IPSec endpoints rewrites the source or
destination address. As a result, the VPN device at the receiving end finds a mismatch between the
hash value and the data and assumes that the data has been maliciously altered.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
143
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
NAT is not normally compatible with ESP in transport mode either, but the NBG5715’s NAT
Traversal feature provides a way to handle this. NAT traversal allows you to set up an IKE SA when
there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers.
Figure 85 NAT Router Between IPSec Routers
Normally you cannot set up an IKE SA with a NAT router between the two IPSec routers because
the NAT router changes the header of the IPSec packet. NAT traversal solves the problem by adding
a UDP port 500 header to the IPSec packet. The NAT router forwards the IPSec packet with the UDP
port 500 header unchanged. In the above figure, when IPSec router A tries to establish an IKE SA,
IPSec router B checks the UDP port 500 header, and IPSec routers A and B build the IKE SA.
For NAT traversal to work, you must:
• Use ESP security protocol (in either transport or tunnel mode).
• Use IKE keying mode.
• Enable NAT traversal on both IPSec endpoints.
• Set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to IPSec router A.
Finally, NAT is compatible with ESP in tunnel mode because integrity checks are performed over the
combination of the "original header plus original payload," which is unchanged by a NAT device. The
compatibility of AH and ESP with NAT in tunnel and transport modes is summarized in the following
table.
Table 58 VPN and NAT
SECURITY PROTOCOL
MODE
NAT
AH
Transport
AH
Tunnel
ESP
Transport
Y*
ESP
Tunnel
Y* - This is supported in the NBG5715 if you enable NAT traversal.
18.7.7 ID Type and Content
With aggressive negotiation mode (see Section 18.7.4 on page 142), the NBG5715 identifies
incoming SAs by ID type and content since this identifying information is not encrypted. This
enables the NBG5715 to distinguish between multiple rules for SAs that connect from remote IPSec
routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses.
Regardless of the ID type and content configuration, the NBG5715 does not allow you to save
multiple active rules with overlapping local and remote IP addresses.
With main mode (see Section 18.7.4 on page 142), the ID type and content are encrypted to
provide identity protection. In this case the NBG5715 can only distinguish between up to 12
different incoming SAs that connect from remote IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP
144
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
addresses. The NBG5715 can distinguish up to 48 incoming SAs because you can select between
three encryption algorithms (DES, 3DES and AES), two authentication algorithms (MD5 and SHA1)
and eight key groups when you configure a VPN rule (see Section 18.4 on page 126). The ID type
and content act as an extra level of identification for incoming SAs.
The type of ID can be a domain name, an IP address or an e-mail address. The content is the IP
address, domain name, or e-mail address.
Table 59 Local ID Type and Content Fields
LOCAL ID TYPE= CONTENT=
IP
Type the IP address of your computer.
DNS
Type a domain name (up to 31 characters) by which to identify this NBG5715.
E-mail
Type an e-mail address (up to 31 characters) by which to identify this NBG5715.
The domain name or e-mail address that you use in the Local ID Content field
is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain
name or e-mail address.
18.7.7.1 ID Type and Content Examples
Two IPSec routers must have matching ID type and content configuration in order to set up a VPN
tunnel.
The two NBG5715s in this example can complete negotiation and establish a VPN tunnel.
Table 60 Matching ID Type and Content Configuration Example
NBG5715 A
NBG5715 B
Local ID type: E-mail
Local ID type: IP
Local ID content: tom@yourcompany.com
Local ID content: 1.1.1.2
Remote ID type: IP
Remote ID type: E-mail
Remote ID content: 1.1.1.2
Remote ID content: tom@yourcompany.com
The two NBG5715s in this example cannot complete their negotiation because NBG5715 B’s Local
ID type is IP, but NBG5715 A’s Remote ID type is set to E-mail. An “ID mismatched” message
displays in the IPSEC LOG.
Table 61 Mismatching ID Type and Content Configuration Example
NBG5715 A
NBG5715 B
Local ID type: IP
Local ID type: IP
Local ID content: 1.1.1.10
Local ID content: 1.1.1.2
Remote ID type: E-mail
Remote ID type: IP
Remote ID content: aa@yahoo.com
Remote ID content: 1.1.1.0
18.7.8 Pre-Shared Key
A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation (see Section
18.7.3 on page 142 for more on IKE phases). It is called “pre-shared” because you have to share it
with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
145
Chapter 18 IPSec VPN
18.7.9 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Groups
Diffie-Hellman (DH) is a public-key cryptography protocol that allows two parties to establish a
shared secret over an unsecured communications channel. Diffie-Hellman is used within IKE SA
setup to establish session keys. 768-bit, 1024-bit 1536-bit, 2048-bit, and 3072-bit Diffie-Hellman
groups are supported. Upon completion of the Diffie-Hellman exchange, the two peers have a
shared secret, but the IKE SA is not authenticated. For authentication, use pre-shared keys.
146
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
19
Bandwidth Management
19.1 Overview
This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management and editing rules.
ZyXEL’s Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an
application.
In the figure below, uplink traffic goes from the LAN device (A) to the WAN device (B). Bandwidth
management is applied before sending the packets out to the WAN. Downlink traffic comes back
from the WAN device (B) to the LAN device (A). Bandwidth management is applied before sending
the traffic out to LAN.
Figure 86 Bandwidth Management Example
-> VOIP
-> FTP
-> HTTP
-> Chat, Email
You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity (bandwidth budgets) to individual
applications (like VoIP, Web, FTP, and E-mail for example).
19.2 What You Can Do this Chapter
• Use the General screen to enable bandwidth management (Section 19.4 on page 148).
• Use the Advanced screen to configure bandwidth managements rule for the pre-defined services
and applications (Section 19.5 on page 148).
19.3 What You Need To Know
The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WAN interface (LAN to WAN, WLAN to WAN)
must be less than or equal to the Upstream Bandwidth that you configure in the Bandwidth
Management Advanced screen (Section 19.5 on page 148).
NBG5715 User’s Guide
147
Chapter 19 Bandwidth Management
The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the LAN interface (WAN to LAN, WAN to WLAN)
must be less than or equal to the Downstream Bandwidth that you configure in the Bandwidth
Management Advanced screen Section 19.5 on page 148.
19.4 General Screen
Use this screen to have the NBG5715 apply bandwidth management.
Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT to open the bandwidth management General screen.
Figure 87 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 62 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable Bandwidth
Management
This field allows you to have NBG5715 apply bandwidth management.
Enable bandwidth management to give traffic that matches a bandwidth rule
priority over traffic that does not match a bandwidth rule.
Enabling bandwidth management also allows you to control the maximum or
minimum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches a
bandwidth rule.
Apply
Click Apply to save your customized settings.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
19.5 Advance Screen
Use this screen to configure bandwidth management rules for the pre-defined services or
applications.
You can also use this screen to configure bandwidth management rule for other services or
applications that are not on the pre-defined list of NBG5715. Additionally, you can define the source
and destination IP addresses and port for a service or application.
Note: The two tables shown in this screen can be configured and applied at the same
time.
148
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 19 Bandwidth Management
Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advance to open the bandwidth management
Advanced screen.
Figure 88 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advance
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 63 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advance
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Management Bandwidth
Upstream
Bandwidth
Select the total amount of bandwidth (from 64 Kilobits to 32 Megabits) that you
want to dedicate to uplink traffic.
This is traffic from LAN/WLAN to WAN.
Downstream
Bandwidth
Select the total amount of bandwidth (from 64 Kilobits to 32 Megabits) that you
want to dedicate to uplink traffic.
This is traffic from WAN to LAN/WLAN.
Application List
Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth based on a pre-defined
service.
This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
149
Chapter 19 Bandwidth Management
Table 63 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advance (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Priority
Select a priority from the drop down list box. The lower the number, the higher
the priority.
•
•
•
Select higher priority for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to
jitter (jitter is the variations in delay).
Select medium priority for "excellent effort" or better than best effort and
would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Select lower priority for non-critical "background" traffic such as bulk
transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and
users.
Category
This is the category where a service belongs.
Service
This is the name of the service.
Select the check box to have the NBG5715 apply this bandwidth management
rule.
User-defined Service
User-defined
Service
Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific applications
or services you specify.
This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule.
Enable
Select this check box to have the NBG5715 apply this bandwidth management
rule.
Direction
From WAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from LAN/WLAN to WAN
(i.e., uplink).
From LAN&WLAN applies bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG5715
forwards to both the LAN and the WLAN.
Service Name
Enter a descriptive name for the bandwidth management rule.
Category
Select a the category where a service belongs.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen. Modify an existing
rule or create a new rule in the Rule Configuration screen. See Section 19.5.1
on page 151 for more information.
Click the Remove icon to delete a rule.
Direction
Select To LAN&WLAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic from WAN to
LAN and WLAN.
Select To WAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic from LAN/WLAN to
WAN.
Service Name
Enter a descriptive name for the bandwidth management rule.
Category
This is the category where a service belongs.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen. Modify an existing
rule or create a new rule in the Rule Configuration screen. See Section 19.5.1
on page 151 for more information.
Apply
Click Apply to save your customized settings.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Click the Remove icon to delete a rule.
150
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 19 Bandwidth Management
19.5.1 Rule Configuration: User Defined Service Rule Configuration
If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for other applications or services, click the Edit
icon in the User-defined Service table of the Advanced screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 89 Bandwidth MGMT Rule Configuration: User-defined Service
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 64 Bandwidth MGMT Rule Configuration: User-defined Service
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Destination Address
Enter the IP address of the destination computer.The NBG5715 applies
bandwidth management to the service or application that is entering this
computer.
Destination Subnet
Netmask
Enter the subnet netmask of the destination of the traffic for which the
bandwidth management rule applies.
Destination Port
This is the port number of the destination that define the traffic type, for
example TCP port 80 defines web traffic.
Source Address
Enter the IP address of the computer that initializes traffic for the
application or service. The NBG5715 applies bandwidth management to
traffic initiating from this computer.
Source Subnet Netmask
Enter the subnet netmask of the computer initiating the traffic for which
the bandwidth management rule applies.
Source Port
This is the port number of the source that define the traffic type, for
example TCP port 80 defines web traffic.
Protocol
Select the protocol (TCP, UDP) for which the bandwidth management rule
applies.
Apply
Click Apply to save your customized settings.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
See Appendix F on page 247 for commonly used services and port numbers
NBG5715 User’s Guide
151
CHAPTER
20
Remote Management
20.1 Overview
This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens.
Remote Management allows you to manage your NBG5715 from a remote location through the
following interfaces:
• LAN and WAN
• LAN only
• WAN only
Note: The NBG5715 is managed using the Web Configurator.
20.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the WWW screen to define the interface/s from which the NBG5715 can be managed
remotely using the web and specify a secure client that can manage the NBG5715 (Section 20.4
on page 153) .
• Use the TELNET screen to define the interface/s from which the NBG5715 can be managed
remotely using Telnet service and specify a secure client that can manage the NBG5715 (Section
20.5 on page 154).
20.3 What You Need to Know
Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when:
The IP address in the Secured Client IP Address field (Section 20.4 on page 153) does not match
the client IP address. If it does not match, the NBG5715 will disconnect the session immediately.
There is already another remote management session. You may only have one remote
management session running at one time.
There is a firewall rule that blocks it.
20.3.1 Remote Management and NAT
When NAT is enabled:
NBG5715 User’s Guide
152
Chapter 20 Remote Management
• Use the NBG5715’s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN.
• Use the NBG5715’s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN.
20.3.2 System Timeout
There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The
NBG5715 automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this
timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling. You
can change the timeout period in the System screen
20.4 WWW Screen
To change your NBG5715’s remote management settings, click Management > Remote MGMT to
open the WWW screen.
Figure 90 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 65 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Port
You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however
you must use the same port number in order to use that service for
remote management.
Access Status
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the
NBG5715 using this service.
Secured Client IP
Address
Select All to allow all computes to access the NBG5715.
Apply
Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Otherwise, check Selected and specify the IP address of the computer
that can access the NBG5715.
153
Chapter 20 Remote Management
20.5 Telnet Screen
To change your NBG5715’s remote management settings, click Management > Remote MGMT >
Telnet to open the Telnet screen.
Figure 91 Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 66 Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet
154
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Port
You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however
you must use the same port number in order to use that service for
remote management.
Access Status
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the
NBG5715 using this service.
Secured Client IP
Address
Select All to allow all computes to access the NBG5715.
Apply
Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Otherwise, check Selected and specify the IP address of the computer
that can access the NBG5715.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
21
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
21.1 Overview
This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the web configurator.
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for
simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a
network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network.
In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.
21.2 What You Need to Know
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP
compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a
UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device.
21.2.1 NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP
network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the
network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions.
NAT traversal allows the following:
• Dynamic port mapping
• Learning public IP addresses
• Assigning lease times to mappings
Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP.
See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT.
21.2.2 Cautions with UPnP
The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening
firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also
be obtained and modified by users in some network environments.
When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For
security reasons, the NBG5715 allows multicast messages on the LAN only.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
155
Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration.
Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.
21.3 UPnP Screen
Use this screen to enable UPnP on your NBG5715.
Click Management > UPnP to display the screen shown next.
Figure 92 Management > UPnP
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 67 Management > UPnP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
UPnP
Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a
UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without
entering the NBG5715's IP address (although you must still enter the
password to access the web configurator).
Apply
Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings.
21.4 Technical Reference
The sections show examples of using UPnP.
21.4.1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example
This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP
installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the NBG5715.
Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the NBG5715. Turn on your computer and
the NBG5715.
21.4.1.1 Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device
156
Click start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under
Internet Gateway.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
Right-click the icon and select Properties.
Figure 93 Network Connections
In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there
were automatically created.
Figure 94 Internet Connection Properties
NBG5715 User’s Guide
157
Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings.
Figure 95 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings
Figure 96 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add
Note: When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port
mappings will be deleted automatically.
Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in
the system tray.
Figure 97 System Tray Icon
158
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status.
Figure 98 Internet Connection Status
21.4.2 Web Configurator Easy Access
With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the NBG5715 without finding out the IP
address of the NBG5715 first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the
NBG5715.
Follow the steps below to access the web configurator.
Click Start and then Control Panel.
Double-click Network Connections.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
159
Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
Select My Network Places under Other Places.
Figure 99 Network Connections
An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network.
Right-click on the icon for your NBG5715 and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen
displays.
Figure 100 Network Connections: My Network Places
160
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
Right-click on the icon for your NBG5715 and select Properties. A properties window displays with
basic information about the NBG5715.
Figure 101 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example
NBG5715 User’s Guide
161
Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
162
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
22
Maintenance
22.1 Overview
This chapter provides information on the Maintenance screens.
22.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the General screen to set the timeout period of the management session (Section 22.3 on
page 163).
• Use the Password screen to change your NBG5715’s system password (Section 22.4 on page
164).
• Use the Time screen to change your NBG5715’s time and date (Section 22.5 on page 165).
• Use the Firmware Upgrade screen to upload firmware to your NBG5715 (Section 22.6 on page
166).
• Use the Backup/Restore screen to view information related to factory defaults, backup
configuration, and restoring configuration (Section 22.7 on page 167).
• Use the Language screen to change the language for the Web Configurator (Section 22.8 on
page 169) .
22.3 General Screen
Use this screen to set the management session timeout period. Click Maintenance > General.
The following screen displays.
Figure 102 Maintenance > General
NBG5715 User’s Guide
163
Chapter 22 Maintenance
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 68 Maintenance > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
System Name
System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG5715 in an Ethernet
network.
Domain Name
Enter the domain name you want to give to the NBG5715.
Administrator
Inactivity Timer
Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the
session times out. After it times out you have to log in with your password
again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks. A value of "0" means a
management session never times out, no matter how long it has been left idle
(not recommended).
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
22.4 Password Screen
It is strongly recommended that you change your NBG5715's password.
If you forget your NBG5715's password (or IP address), you will need to reset the device. See
Section 22.7 on page 167 for details.
Click Maintenance > Password. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 103 Maintenance > Password
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 69 Maintenance > Password
164
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Password Setup
Change your NBG5715’s password (recommended) using the fields as shown.
Old Password
Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the
system in this field.
New Password
Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type
a password, the screen displays an asterisk (*) for each character you type.
Retype to Confirm
Type the new password again in this field.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Maintenance
22.5 Time Setting Screen
Use this screen to configure the NBG5715’s time based on your local time zone. To change your
NBG5715’s time and date, click Maintenance > Time. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 104 Maintenance > Time
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 70 Maintenance > Time
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Current Time and Date
Current Time
This field displays the time of your NBG5715.
Each time you reload this page, the NBG5715 synchronizes the time with the
time server.
Current Date
This field displays the date of your NBG5715.
Each time you reload this page, the NBG5715 synchronizes the date with the
time server.
Current Time and Date
Manual
Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure
a new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the
new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight
Saving settings do not affect it.
New Time
This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time
configured manually.
(hh:mm:ss)
When you select Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click
Apply.
New Date
(yyyy/mm/dd)
This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date
configured manually.
When you select Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click
Apply.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
165
Chapter 22 Maintenance
Table 70 Maintenance > Time (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Get from Time
Server
Select this radio button to have the NBG5715 get the time and date from the
time server you specified below.
User Defined Time
Server Address
Select User Defined Time Server Address and enter the IP address or URL
(up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with
your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.
Time Zone Setup
Time Zone
Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference
between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Daylight Savings
Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries
set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime
light in the evening.
Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start Date
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected
Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a
couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first
Sunday of April. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight
Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select
First, Sunday, April and type 2 in the o'clock field.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of
March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving
Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union
you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field
depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2
because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
End Date
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected
Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a
couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October.
Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2
A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Last, Sunday,
October and type 2 in the o'clock field.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of
October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight
Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European
Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the
o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would
type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC
(GMT+1).
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG5715.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
22.6 Firmware Upgrade Screen
Find firmware at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses the system model name with a “*.bin”
extension, e.g., “NBG5715.bin”. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and
may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot.
166
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Maintenance
Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload
firmware to your NBG5715.
Figure 105 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 71 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to
find it.
Browse...
Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must
decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload
Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two
minutes.
Note: Do not turn off the NBG5715 while firmware upload is in progress!
After you see the Firmware Upload In Process screen, wait two minutes before logging into the
NBG5715 again.
The NBG5715 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some
operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 106 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen.
If the upload was not successful, an error message appears. Click Return to go back to the
Firmware Upgrade screen.
22.7 Backup/Restore Screen
Backup configuration allows you to back up (save) the NBG5715’s current configuration to a file on
your computer. Once your NBG5715 is configured and functioning properly, it is highly
recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The
backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
167
Chapter 22 Maintenance
Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your
computer to your NBG5715.
Click Maintenance > Backup/Restore. Information related to factory defaults, backup
configuration, and restoring configuration appears as shown next.
Figure 107 Maintenance > Backup/Restore
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 72 Maintenance > Backup/Restore
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Backup
Click Backup to save the NBG5715’s current configuration to your computer.
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to
find it.
Browse...
Click Browse... to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must
decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.
Upload
Click Upload to begin the upload process.
Note: Do not turn off the NBG5715 while configuration file upload is in progress.
After you see a “configuration upload successful” screen, you must then wait one
minute before logging into the NBG5715 again. The NBG5715 automatically restarts
in this time causing a temporary network disconnect.
If you see an error screen, click Back to return to the Backup/Restore screen.
Reset
Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user-entered
configuration information and returns the NBG5715 to its factory defaults.
You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults
of your NBG5715. Refer to the chapter about introducing the Web Configurator for
more information on the RESET button.
Note: If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP
address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default NBG5715
IP address (192.168.1.2). See Appendix D on page 205 for details on how to set up
your computer’s IP address.
168
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Maintenance
22.8 The Language Screen
Use this screen to change the language for the Web Configurator.
Select the language you prefer and click Apply. The Web Configurator language changes after a
while without restarting the NBG5715.
Figure 108
NBG5715 User’s Guide
169
Chapter 22 Maintenance
170
NBG5715 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
23
Troubleshooting
23.1 Overview
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential
problems are divided into the following categories.
• Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
• NBG5715 Access and Login
• Internet Access
• Resetting the NBG5715 to Its Factory Defaults
• Wireless Router Troubleshooting
• USB Device Problems
• ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Problems
23.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The NBG5715 does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NBG5715.
Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NBG5715 and plugged in to an appropriate
power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG5715.
Make sure the LED button on the side panel of the NBG5715 is at the ON position. If the LED
button is turned off, the Power LED should be still on for you to determin if the NBG5715 is
receiving power.
If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on page 23.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
171
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide.
Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor to the NBG5715.
If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
23.3 NBG5715 Access and Login
I don’t know the IP address of my NBG5715.
The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the NBG5715
by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows
computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default
Gateway might be the IP address of the NBG5715 (it depends on the network), so enter this IP
address in your Internet browser.Set your device to Router Mode, login (see the Quick Start Guide
for instructions) and go to the Device Information table in the Status screen. Your NBG5715’s IP
address is available in the Device Information table.
• If the DHCP setting under LAN information is None, your device has a fixed IP address.
• If the DHCP setting under LAN information is Client, then your device receives an IP
address from a DHCP server on the network.
If your NBG5715 is a DHCP client, you can find your IP address from the DHCP server. This
information is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses on your network.
Find this information directly from the DHCP server or contact your system administrator for more
information.
Reset your NBG5715 to change all settings back to their default. This means your current settings
are lost. See Section 23.5 on page 175 in the Troubleshooting for information on resetting your
NBG5715.
I forgot the password.
The default password is 1234.
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 23.5 on page
175.
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator.
172
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
• If you changed the IP address (Section 12.4 on page 97), use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I
don’t know the IP address of my NBG5715.
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick
Start Guide.
Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScript and Java
enabled. See Appendix B on page 183.
Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NBG5715. (If you know that there are
routers between your computer and the NBG5715, skip this step.)
• If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP
address. See Section 13.2 on page 99.
• If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer’s IP address is in the
same subnet as the NBG5715. See Appendix C on page 196.
Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the NBG5715 with the default IP address.
See Chapter 22 on page 167.
If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced
suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Try to access the NBG5715 using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the
NBG5715, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the
NBG5715 does not respond to HTTP.
• If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is
connected to a LAN/ETHERNET port.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the NBG5715.
Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default password is 1234. This field is
case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
You cannot log in to the Web Configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the NBG5715.
Log out of the NBG5715 in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out.
This can happen when you fail to log out properly from your last session. Try logging in again after
5 minutes.
Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG5715.
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 23.5 on page
175.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
173
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
23.4 Internet Access
I cannot access the Internet.
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick
Start Guide.
Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard. These fields are casesensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless
client are the same as the settings in the AP.
Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again.
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the NBG5715), but
my Internet connection is not available anymore.
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick
Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 23.
Reboot the NBG5715.
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
The Internet connection is slow or intermittent.
There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 1.5 on page 23.
If the NBG5715 is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the
Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications.
Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving the NBG5715 closer to the AP if
possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless
network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on).
Reboot the NBG5715.
If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced
suggestions.
Advanced Suggestion
174
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
• Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it.
23.5 Resetting the NBG5715 to Its Factory Defaults
If you reset the NBG5715, you lose all of the changes you have made. The NBG5715 re-loads its
default settings, and the password resets to 1234. You have to make all of your changes again.
You will lose all of your changes when you push the RESET button.
To reset the NBG5715:
Make sure the power LED is on.
Press the RESET button for longer than 1 second to restart/reboot the NBG5715.
Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG5715 back to its factory-default
configurations.
If the NBG5715 restarts automatically, wait for the NBG5715 to finish restarting, and log in to the
Web Configurator. The password is “1234”.
If the NBG5715 does not restart automatically, disconnect and reconnect the NBG5715’s power.
Then, follow the directions above again.
23.6 Wireless Router Troubleshooting
I cannot access the NBG5715 or ping any computer from the WLAN.
Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the NBG5715. Check if the WLAN button is at the ON
position. Or you can enable the wireless LAN in the Network > Wireless LAN 2.4G/5G >
General screen.
Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly.
Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802.11 compatible and supports
the same wireless standard as the NBG5715.
Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the transmission range of the
NBG5715.
Check that both the NBG5715 and your wireless station are using the same wireless and wireless
security settings.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
175
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
Make sure traffic between the WLAN and the LAN is not blocked by the firewall on the NBG5715.
Make sure you allow the NBG5715 to be remotely accessed through the WLAN interface. Check
your remote management settings.
• See the chapter on Wireless LAN in the User’s Guide for more information.
I can access the Internet, but I cannot open my network folders.
If you cannot access a network folder, make sure your account has access rights to the folder you
are trying to open.
What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this
problem?
The following factors may cause interference:
• Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on.
• Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs.
• Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless
devices.
To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:
• Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low.
• Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding
wireless electronics such as cordless phones.
• Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and
the wireless client.
• Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add
additional APs if necessary.
• Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the
wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open
that use the Internet.
• Position the antennas for best reception. If the AP is placed on a table or floor, point the antennas
upwards. If the AP is placed at a high position, point the antennas downwards. Try pointing the
antennas in different directions and check which provides the strongest signal to the wireless
clients.
23.7 USB Device Problems
I cannot access or see a USB device that is connected to the NBG5715.
176
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
Be sure to install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility (for NetUSB functionality) first from the
included disc, or download the latest version from the zyxel.com website.
Disconnect the problematic USB device, then reconnect it to the NBG5715.
Ensure that the USB device in question has power.
Check your cable connections.
Restart the NBG5715 by disconnecting the power and then reconnecting it.
If the USB device requires a special driver, install the driver from the installation disc that came
with the device. After driver installation, reconnect the USB device to the NBG5715 and try to
connect to it again with your computer.
If the problem persists, contact your vendor.
What kind of USB devices do the NBG5715 support?
It is strongly recommended to use version 2.0 or lower USB storage devices (such as memory
sticks, USB hard drives) and/or USB devices (such as USB printers). Other USB products are not
guaranteed to function properly with the NBG5715.
23.8 ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility Problems
I cannot install the ZyXEL NetUSB Share Center Utility.
Make sure that the set up program is one required for your operating system.
Install the latest patches and updates for your operating system.
Check the zyxel.com’s Download Library site and look for a newer version of the utility software
under the device’s model name.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
177
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
178
NBG5715 User’s Guide
APPENDIX
Product Specifications
The following tables summarize the NBG5715’s hardware and firmware features.
Table 73 Hardware Features
Dimensions
213.7 mm (W) x 164 mm (D) x 73.6 mm (H)
Weight
251g
SDRAM
128 MB
Flash Memory
128 MB
Power Specification
Input: 100~240AC, 50/60Hz, 0.8A
Ethernet ports
Auto-negotiating: 100 Mbps, 1000 Mbps in either half-duplex or fullduplex mode.
Output: 12V 2A
Auto-crossover: Use either crossover or straight-through Ethernet cables.
Built-in Switch
A combination of switch and router makes your NBG5715 a cost-effective
and viable network solution. You can add up to two computers to the
NBG5715 without the cost of a hub when connecting to the Internet
through the WAN port. You can add up to three computers to the NBG5715
when you connect to the Internet in AP mode. Add more than four
computers to your LAN by using a hub.
LEDs
Power, LAN1-4, WAN, Internet, WLAN_2.4G, WLAN 5G, WPS, USB1-2
LED On/Off Switch
One LED On/Off switch to control the LEDs.
Reset button
The reset button is built into the rear panel. Use this button to restore the
NBG5715 to its factory default settings. Press for 1 second to restart the
device. Press for 5 seconds to restore to factory default settings.
WPS button
Press the WPS on two WPS enabled devices within 120 seconds for a
security-enabled wireless connection.
Power switch
Turn on or turn off the power of the NBG5715 using this switch.
WLAN switch
Turn on or turn off the 2.4G and 5G wireless function by using this switch.
Antenna
The NBG5715 is equipped with three 2dBi (2.4GHz and 5GHz) detachable
antenna to provide clear radio transmission and reception on the wireless
network.
USB Port
The NBG5715 has two built-in USB 2.0 type A for USB device connectivity.
Operation Environment
Temperature: 0º C ~ 45º C / 32ºF ~113ºF
Humidity: 10% ~ 90%
Storage Environment
Temperature: -40º C ~ 70º C / -40ºF ~ 158ºF
Humidity: 10% ~ 95%
NBG5715 User’s Guide
179
Appendix A Product Specifications
Table 74 Firmware Features
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
Default LAN IP Address
192.168.1.1
Default LAN Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0 (24 bits)
Default Password
1234
DHCP Pool
192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64
Wireless Interface
Wireless LAN 2.4GHz, 5GHz
Default Wireless SSID
ZyXEL
Device Management
Use the Web Configurator to easily configure the rich range of features
on the NBG5715.
Wireless Functionality
Allows IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE
802.11n wireless clients to connect to the NBG5715 wirelessly. Enable
wireless security (WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your
wireless network.
Note: The NBG5715 may be prone to RF (Radio Frequency)
interference from other 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz devices such as
microwave ovens, wireless phones, Bluetooth enabled devices,
and other wireless LANs.
Firmware Upgrade
Download new firmware (when available) from the ZyXEL web site and
use the Web Configurator to put it on the NBG5715.
Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!
180
Configuration Backup &
Restoration
Make a copy of the NBG5715’s configuration and put it back on the
NBG5715 later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier
configuration.
Network Address
Translation (NAT)
Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address.
Use NAT to convert a single public IP address to multiple private IP
addresses for the computers on your network.
Firewall
You can configure firewall on the NBG5715 for secure Internet access.
When the firewall is on, by default, all incoming traffic from the
Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your
network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are
not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files
for example.
IPSec VPN
This allows you to establish a secure Virtual Private Network (VPN)
tunnel to connect with business partners and branch offices using data
encryption and the Internet without the expense of leased site-to-site
lines. The NBG5715 VPN is based on the IPSec standard and is fully
interoperable with other IPSec-based VPN products.
Bandwidth Management
You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving
bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to
particular computers.
Remote Management
This allows you to decide whether a service (HTTP traffic for example)
from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for example) can access
the NBG5715.
Wireless LAN Scheduler
You can schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled/disabled.
Time and Date
Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn
on your NBG5715. You can also set the time manually. These dates and
times are then used in logs.
Port Forwarding
If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your network,
then use this feature to let people access it from the Internet.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix A Product Specifications
Table 74 Firmware Features (continued)
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol)
Use this feature to have the NBG5715 assign IP addresses, an IP
default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network.
Dynamic DNS Support
With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use a
fixed URL, www.zyxel.com for example, with a dynamic IP address. You
must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider.
IP Multicast
IP Multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers. The
NBG5715 supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP (Internet Group
Management Protocol) used to join multicast groups (see RFC 2236).
IP Alias
IP Alias allows you to subdivide a physical network into logical networks
over the same Ethernet interface with the NBG5715 itself as the
gateway for each subnet.
PPPoE
PPPoE mimics a dial-up Internet access connection.
PPTP Encapsulation
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) enables secure transfer of data
through a Virtual Private Network (VPN). The NBG5715 supports one
PPTP connection at a time.
Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP)
The NBG5715 can communicate with other UPnP enabled devices in a
network.
23.9 Wall-mounting Instructions
Complete the following steps to hang your NBG5715 on a wall.
Select a position free of obstructions on a sturdy wall.
Drill two holes for the screws.
Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall
when drilling holes for the screws.
Do not insert the screws all the way into the wall. Leave a small gap of about 0.5 cm between the
heads of the screws and the wall.
Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall. They need to hold the weight of the NBG5715
with the connection cables.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
181
Appendix A Product Specifications
Align the holes on the back of the NBG5715 with the screws on the wall. Hang the NBG5715 on the
screws.
Figure 109 Wall-mounting Example
The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting. All
measurements are in millimeters (mm).
Figure 110 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw
182
NBG5715 User’s Guide
APPENDIX
Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java
Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
Note: The screens used below belong to Internet Explorer version 6, 7 and 8. Screens for
other Internet Explorer versions may vary.
Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers
You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device.
Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow
pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP address.
Disable Pop-up Blockers
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker.
Figure 111 Pop-up Blocker
You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab.
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
183
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any
web pop-up blockers you may have enabled.
Figure 112 Internet Options: Privacy
Click Apply to save this setting.
Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions
Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps.
184
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
Select Settings…to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.
Figure 113 Internet Options: Privacy
Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the
prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.167.1.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
185
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites.
Figure 114 Pop-up Blocker Settings
Click Close to return to the Privacy screen.
Click Apply to save this setting.
JavaScript
If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScript
are allowed.
186
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Figure 115 Internet Options: Security
Click the Custom Level... button.
Scroll down to Scripting.
Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
NBG5715 User’s Guide
187
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
Click OK to close the window.
Figure 116 Security Settings - Java Scripting
Java Permissions
188
From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Click the Custom Level... button.
Scroll down to Microsoft VM.
Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
Click OK to close the window.
Figure 117 Security Settings - Java
JAVA (Sun)
From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab.
Make sure that Use Java 2 for  under Java (Sun) is selected.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
189
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
Click OK to close the window.
Figure 118 Java (Sun)
Mozilla Firefox
Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary slightly. The steps
below apply to Mozilla Firefox 3.0 as well.
You can enable Java, Javascript and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the
screen that appears.
Figure 119 Mozilla Firefox: TOOLS > Options
190
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
Click Content to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen.
Figure 120 Mozilla Firefox Content Security
Opera
Opera 10 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary slightly.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
191
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
Allowing Pop-Ups
From Opera, click Tools, then Preferences. In the General tab, go to Choose how you prefer
to handle pop-ups and select Open all pop-ups.
Figure 121 Opera: Allowing Pop-Ups
Enabling Java
From Opera, click Tools, then Preferences. In the Advanced tab, select Content from the leftside menu. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen.
Figure 122 Opera: Enabling Java
192
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
To customize JavaScript behavior in the Opera browser, click JavaScript Options.
Figure 123 Opera: JavaScript Options
Select the items you want Opera’s JavaScript to apply.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
193
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
194
NBG5715 User’s Guide
APPENDIX
IP Addresses and Subnetting
This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks.
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including
computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the
network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use
subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
Introduction to IP Addresses
One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same
way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common
network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has
its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets
to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are
delivered.
Structure
An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example,
192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary
number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation).
Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in
decimal.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
195
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets (192.168.1) are
the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID.
Figure 124 Network Number and Host ID
How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according
to the subnet mask.
Subnet Masks
A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are
part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term “subnet” is short for “sub-network”.
A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a “1” then the corresponding bit in the IP
address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is “0” then the corresponding bit
in the IP address is part of the host ID.
The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host
ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal).
Table 75 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example
1ST OCTET: 2ND
OCTET:
3RD
OCTET:
4TH OCTET
(192)
(1)
(2)
(168)
IP Address (Binary)
11000000
10101000
00000001
00000010
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
Network Number
11000000
10101000
00000001
Host ID
00000010
By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the
leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits.
Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a “1” value).
For example, an “8-bit mask” means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24
bits are zeroes.
196
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following
examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks.
Table 76 Subnet Masks
BINARY
DECIMAL
1ST
OCTET
2ND
OCTET
3RD
OCTET
4TH OCTET
8-bit mask
11111111
00000000
00000000
00000000
255.0.0.0
16-bit mask
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
255.255.0.0
24-bit mask
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
255.255.255.0
29-bit mask
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111000
255.255.255.248
Network Size
The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have
on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of
remaining host ID bits.
An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network (192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit
subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that
network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example).
As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of
possible hosts in a network as follows:
Table 77 Maximum Host Numbers
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF
HOSTS
SUBNET MASK
HOST ID SIZE
8 bits
255.0.0.0
24 bits
224 – 2
16777214
16 bits
255.255.0.0
16 bits
216 – 2
65534
24 bits
255.255.255.0
8 bits
28 – 2
254
3 bits
23
29 bits
255.255.255.248
–2
Notation
Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a
continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the
number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a “/”
followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address.
For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128.
The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations.
Table 78 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation
SUBNET MASK
ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION
LAST OCTET
(BINARY)
LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.0
/24
0000 0000
255.255.255.128
/25
1000 0000
128
255.255.255.192
/26
1100 0000
192
NBG5715 User’s Guide
197
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 78 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation (continued)
SUBNET MASK
ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION
LAST OCTET
(BINARY)
LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.224
/27
1110 0000
224
255.255.255.240
/28
1111 0000
240
255.255.255.248
/29
1111 1000
248
255.255.255.252
/30
1111 1100
252
Subnetting
You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example
a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the
company network for security reasons.
In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address
(192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum
of 28 – 2 or 254 possible hosts.
The following figure shows the company network before subnetting.
Figure 125 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting
You can “borrow” one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate subnetworks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or /25).
The “borrowed” host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25
and 192.168.1.128 /25.
198
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two subnetworks, A and B.
Figure 126 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting
In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 27 – 2 or 126
possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet’s address itself, all ones is the subnet’s
broadcast address).
192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask
255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to
an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126.
Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254.
Example: Four Subnets
The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two
subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to “borrow” two host ID
bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192.
Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all
zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnet’s broadcast address).
Table 79 Subnet 1
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address (Decimal)
192.168.1.
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
00000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
NBG5715 User’s Guide
199
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 79 Subnet 1 (continued)
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
Table 80 Subnet 2
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address
192.168.1.
64
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
01000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126
Table 81 Subnet 3
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address
192.168.1.
128
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
10000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190
Table 82 Subnet 4
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address
192.168.1.
192
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
11000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254
Example: Eight Subnets
Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111).
200
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet.
Table 83 Eight Subnets
SUBNET
SUBNET
ADDRESS
FIRST ADDRESS
LAST
ADDRESS
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
30
31
32
33
62
63
64
65
94
95
96
97
126
127
128
129
158
159
160
161
190
191
192
193
222
223
224
225
254
255
Subnet Planning
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number.
Table 84 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK
NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
255.255.255.128 (/25)
126
255.255.255.192 (/26)
62
255.255.255.224 (/27)
30
255.255.255.240 (/28)
16
14
255.255.255.248 (/29)
32
255.255.255.252 (/30)
64
255.255.255.254 (/31)
128
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number.
Table 85 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK
NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
255.255.128.0 (/17)
32766
255.255.192.0 (/18)
16382
255.255.224.0 (/19)
8190
255.255.240.0 (/20)
16
4094
255.255.248.0 (/21)
32
2046
255.255.252.0 (/22)
64
1022
255.255.254.0 (/23)
128
510
255.255.255.0 (/24)
256
254
255.255.255.128 (/25)
512
126
10
255.255.255.192 (/26)
1024
62
11
255.255.255.224 (/27)
2048
30
12
255.255.255.240 (/28)
4096
14
NBG5715 User’s Guide
201
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 85 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning (continued)
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK
NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
13
255.255.255.248 (/29)
8192
14
255.255.255.252 (/30)
16384
15
255.255.255.254 (/31)
32768
Configuring IP Addresses
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your
network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in
selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user
account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this
is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to
192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses
specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You
must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the NBG5715.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your NBG5715 that is easy to
remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using
that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG5715 will
compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need
to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG5715 unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the
Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to
the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has
reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0
• 172.16.0.0
— 10.255.255.255
— 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private
network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP
can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are
part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the
appropriate IP addresses.
Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the
guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address
Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.
202
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
IP Address Conflicts
Each device on a network must have a unique IP address. Devices with duplicate IP addresses on
the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources. The devices may also
be unreachable through the network.
Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example
More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example computer A has a
static (or fixed) IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to
computer B which is a DHCP client. Neither can access the Internet. This problem can be solved by
assigning a different static IP address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address
automatically.
Figure 127 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example
Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example
Since a router connects different networks, it must have interfaces using different network
numbers. For example, if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet (WAN), the router’s LAN
and WAN addresses must be on different subnets. In the following example, the LAN and WAN are
on the same subnet. The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot
route between networks.
Figure 128 Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example
NBG5715 User’s Guide
203
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example
More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example, the computer and
the router’s LAN port both use 192.168.1.1 as the IP address. The computer cannot access the
Internet. This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the
router’s LAN port.
Figure 129 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example
204
NBG5715 User’s Guide
APPENDIX
Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Note: Your specific NBG5715 may not support all of the operating systems described in
this appendix. See the product specifications for more information about which
operating systems are supported.
This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be
able to communicate with the other devices on your network. Windows Vista/XP/2000, Mac OS 9/
OS X, and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP/IP on
your computer.
If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP, make sure that your network’s
computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet.
In this appendix, you can set up an IP address for:
• Windows XP/NT/2000 on page 206
• Windows Vista on page 209
• Windows 7 on page 213
• Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 on page 217
• Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6 on page 220
• Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) on page 223
• Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) on page 227
NBG5715 User’s Guide
205
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Windows XP/NT/2000
The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows
2000 and Windows NT.
206
Click Start > Control Panel.
In the Control Panel, click the Network Connections icon.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties.
On the General tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and then click Properties.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
207
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens.
Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP
address dynamically.
Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default
gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network
administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS
server, if that information was provided.
Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
Verifying Settings
Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER].
You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a network
connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection
information.
208
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Windows Vista
This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional.
Click Start > Control Panel.
In the Control Panel, click the Network and Internet icon.
Click the Network and Sharing Center icon.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
209
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Click Manage network connections.
Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties.
Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying
that it needs your permission to continue.
210
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
211
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens.
Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP
address dynamically.
Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default
gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network
administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS
server, if that information was provided.Click Advanced.
Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
Verifying Settings
Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER].
You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a network
connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection
information.
212
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Windows 7
This section shows screens from Windows 7 Enterprise.
Click Start > Control Panel.
In the Control Panel, click View network status and tasks under the Network and Internet
category.
Click Change adapter settings.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
213
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Double click Local Area Connection and then select Properties.
Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying
that it needs your permission to continue.
214
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
215
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens.
Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP
address dynamically.
Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default
gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network
administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS
server, if that information was provided. Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced
settings for IP, DNS and WINS.
216
Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Verifying Settings
Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER].
The IP settings are displayed as follows.
Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4
The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.4 but can also apply to 10.3.
Click Apple > System Preferences.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
217
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
218
In the System Preferences window, click the Network icon.
When the Network preferences pane opens, select Built-in Ethernet from the network
connection type list, and then click Configure.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4 list in the TCP/IP
tab.
For statically assigned settings, do the following:
• From the Configure IPv4 list, select Manually.
• In the IP Address field, type your IP address.
• In the Subnet Mask field, type your subnet mask.
• In the Router field, type the IP address of your device.
Click Apply Now and close the window.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
219
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network Utilities, and then
selecting the appropriate Network Interface from the Info tab.
Figure 130 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Utility
Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6
The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.5 but can also apply to 10.6.
220
Click Apple > System Preferences.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
In System Preferences, click the Network icon.
When the Network preferences pane opens, select Ethernet from the list of available connection
types.
From the Configure list, select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
221
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
For statically assigned settings, do the following:
• From the Configure list, select Manually.
• In the IP Address field, enter your IP address.
• In the Subnet Mask field, enter your subnet mask.
• In the Router field, enter the IP address of your NBG5715.
222
Click Apply and close the window.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network Utilities, and then
selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info tab.
Figure 131 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Utility
Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME)
This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in the GNU Object Model
Environment (GNOME) using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file
locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual
configuration. The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation.
Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.
Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME:
Click System > Administration > Network.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
223
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
224
When the Network Settings window opens, click Unlock to open the Authenticate window. (By
default, the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked.) You cannot make changes to your
configuration unless you first enter your admin password.
In the Authenticate window, enter your admin account name and password then click the
Authenticate button.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
In the Network Settings window, select the connection that you want to configure, then click
Properties.
The Properties dialog box opens.
• In the Configuration list, select Automatic Configuration (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP
address.
• In the Configuration list, select Static IP address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the
IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway address fields.
Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to the Network
Settings screen.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
225
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
226
If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Settings window
and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided.
Click the Close button to apply the changes.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking System > Administration > Network Tools, and then
selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices tab. The Interface Statistics
column shows data if your connection is working properly.
Figure 132 Ubuntu 8: Network Tools
Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE)
This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in the K Desktop
Environment (KDE) using the openSUSE 10.3 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file
locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual
configuration. The following screens use the default openSUSE 10.3 installation.
Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.
Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE:
NBG5715 User’s Guide
227
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
228
Click K Menu > Computer > Administrator Settings (YaST).
When the Run as Root - KDE su dialog opens, enter the admin password and click OK.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
When the YaST Control Center window opens, select Network Devices and then click the
Network Card icon.
When the Network Settings window opens, click the Overview tab, select the appropriate
connection Name from the list, and then click the Configure button.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
229
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
When the Network Card Setup window opens, click the Address tab
Figure 133 openSUSE 10.3: Network Card Setup
Select Dynamic Address (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address.
Select Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the IP address,
Subnet mask, and Hostname fields.
230
Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the Hostname/DNS tab in Network Settings
and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided.
Click Finish to save your settings and close the window.
Verifying Settings
Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP/IP properties. From the
Options sub-menu, select Show Connection Information.
Figure 134 openSUSE 10.3: KNetwork Manager
NBG5715 User’s Guide
231
Appendix D Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
When the Connection Status - KNetwork Manager window opens, click the Statistics tab to
see if your connection is working properly.
Figure 135 openSUSE: Connection Status - KNetwork Manager
232
NBG5715 User’s Guide
APPENDIX
Wireless LANs
Wireless LAN Topologies
This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies.
Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration
The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of
computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within
range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an
ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example
of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN.
Figure 136 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network
BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a
wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless
client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is
NBG5715 User’s Guide
233
Appendix E Wireless LANs
disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with
each other.
Figure 137 Basic Service Set
ESS
An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access
point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection
between APs is called a Distribution System (DS).
This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only
provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the
immediate neighborhood.
234
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix E Wireless LANs
An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated
wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate.
Figure 138 Infrastructure WLAN
Channel
A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data.
Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your
region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce
interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing
interference and degrading performance.
Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should
be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For
example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to
select a channel between 6 or 11.
RTS/CTS
A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not
within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are
within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they
NBG5715 User’s Guide
235
Appendix E Wireless LANs
cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore,
they are considered hidden from each other.
Figure 139
RTS/CTS
When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the
channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of
data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations.
RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest
size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is
invoked.
When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station
that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for
permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other
stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms
with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission.
Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and
the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the
RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be
fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could
negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy.
Fragmentation Threshold
A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes)
that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data
frames.
A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while
you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference.
236
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix E Wireless LANs
If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you
set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames
will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
Preamble Type
Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of
the synchronization field in a packet.
Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending
data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short
preamble.
Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network
support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks.
Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide
more efficient communications.
Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the
network support it, otherwise the NBG5715 uses long preamble.
Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate.
IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b
adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or
lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the
maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Table 86 IEEE 802.11g
DATA RATE (MBPS)
MODULATION
DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed)
DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)
5.5 / 11
CCK (Complementary Code Keying)
6/9/12/18/24/36/48/
54
OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)
Wireless Security Overview
Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless
clients, access points and the wired network.
Wireless security methods available on the NBG5715 are data encryption, wireless client
authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the NBG5715 identity.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
237
Appendix E Wireless LANs
The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on
your NBG5715.
Table 87 Wireless Security Levels
SECURITY
LEVEL
Least
Secure
SECURITY TYPE
Unique SSID (Default)
Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled
MAC Address Filtering
WEP Encryption
IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
WPA2
Most Secure
Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the NBG5715 and on all
wireless clients that you want to associate with it.
IEEE 802.1x
In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to
support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It
is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x
are:
• User based identification that allows for roaming.
• Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for
centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server.
• Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional
authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless
clients.
RADIUS
RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and
accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server
handles the following tasks:
• Authentication
Determines the identity of the users.
• Authorization
Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the
network.
• Accounting
Keeps track of the client’s network activity.
238
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix E Wireless LANs
RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the
wireless client and the network RADIUS server.
Types of RADIUS Messages
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS
server for user authentication:
• Access-Request
Sent by an access point requesting authentication.
• Access-Reject
Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access.
• Access-Accept
Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access.
• Access-Challenge
Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point
sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message.
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS
server for user accounting:
• Accounting-Request
Sent by the access point requesting accounting.
• Accounting-Response
Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting.
In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret
key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the
shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from
unauthorized access.
Types of EAP Authentication
This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and
LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types.
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE
802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP
to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a
RADIUS server perform authentication.
The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that
supports IEEE 802.1x. .
For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain
the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate (also called digital IDs) can be used
to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate
owner.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
239
Appendix E Wireless LANs
EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)
MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server
sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client ‘proves’ that it knows the password by
encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in
plain text.
However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get
the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the
authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an
authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication.
Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You
must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption.
EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)
With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for
mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of
the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done
in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive
attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender’s identity.
However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which
imposes a management overhead.
EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)
EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the serverside authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending
username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client
authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP,
CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2.
PEAP (Protected EAP)
Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then
use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the
clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5,
EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is
implemented only by Cisco.
LEAP
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x.
Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the
wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is
generated each time reauthentication is performed.
240
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix E Wireless LANs
If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless
security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while
dynamic WEP is enabled.
Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic
keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public
deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a
comparison of the features of authentication types.
Table 88 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types
EAP-MD5
EAP-TLS
EAP-TTLS
PEAP
LEAP
Mutual Authentication
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Certificate – Client
No
Yes
Optional
Optional
No
Certificate – Server
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Dynamic Key Exchange
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Credential Integrity
None
Strong
Strong
Strong
Moderate
Deployment Difficulty
Easy
Hard
Moderate
Moderate
Moderate
Client Identity Protection
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
WPA and WPA2
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a
wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management
than WPA.
Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user
authentication.
If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use
WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use
WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into
each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless
client will be granted access to a WLAN.
If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on
whether you have an external RADIUS server or not.
Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less
secure than WPA or WPA2.
Encryption
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity
Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but
offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter
mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP).
TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server.
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm
NBG5715 User’s Guide
241
Appendix E Wireless LANs
called Rijndael. They both include a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check
(MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying
mechanism.
WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is
never used twice.
The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key
hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption
keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless
clients. This all happens in the background automatically.
The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets,
altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the
receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is
assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped.
By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity
checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi
network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network.
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference
between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific
credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force
password-guessing attacks but it’s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent,
single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal
encryption keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of
WEP)
User Authentication
WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate
wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange
messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a
network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and
pre-authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless
devices.
Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication
with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not
need to go with the authentication process again.
Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an
AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it.
Wireless Client WPA Supplicants
A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless
client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch
for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client.
The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero
Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it.
242
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix E Wireless LANs
WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812),
and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server
looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system.
The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server.
The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies
network access accordingly.
A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS
server and the client.
The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and
management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The
keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and
the wireless clients.
Figure 140 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
WPA(2)-PSK Application Example
A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows.
First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must
consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and
symbols).
The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password
matches.
The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not
sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
243
Appendix E Wireless LANs
The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information
exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data
exchanged between them.
Figure 141 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication
Security Parameters Summary
Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each
authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on
how you configure these security features.
Table 89 Wireless Security Relational Matrix
AUTHENTICATION
ENCRYPTIO
METHOD/ KEY
N METHOD
MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL
ENTER
MANUAL KEY
IEEE 802.1X
Open
None
No
Disable
Open
WEP
No
Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Disable
No
Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Disable
Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Shared
WEP
WPA
TKIP/AES
No
Enable
WPA-PSK
TKIP/AES
Yes
Disable
WPA2
TKIP/AES
No
Enable
WPA2-PSK
TKIP/AES
Yes
Disable
Antenna Overview
An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to
the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by
capturing RF signals from the air.
244
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix E Wireless LANs
Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN.
Antenna Characteristics
Frequency
An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz (IEEE 802.11a)
is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN
Radiation Pattern
A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna’s coverage
area.
Antenna Gain
Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width.
Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications.
For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately
2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of
approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment.
Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal
power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna
that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the
antenna provides.
Types of Antennas for WLAN
There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications.
• Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The
coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room
environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage
areas with multiple access points.
• Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light
from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles
typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional
antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications.
Positioning Antennas
In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In
point-to–point application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to
each other to attain the best performance.
For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For
omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP
application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
245
Appendix E Wireless LANs
For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area.
246
NBG5715 User’s Guide
APPENDIX
Common Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port
numbers. For a comprehensive list of port numbers, ICMP type/code numbers and services, visit
the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) web site.
• Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a
different one, if you like.
• Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service
uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP
protocol number, not the port number.
• Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information
about port numbers.
• If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
• If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
• Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations
in which this service is used.
Table 90 Commonly Used Services
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
AH
(IPSEC_TUNNEL)
User-Defined
51
The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header)
tunneling protocol uses this service.
AIM/New-ICQ
TCP
5190
AOL’s Internet Messenger service. It is
also used as a listening port by ICQ.
AUTH
TCP
113
Authentication protocol used by some
servers.
BGP
TCP
179
Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT
UDP
68
DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER
UDP
67
DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME
TCP
7648
A popular videoconferencing solution from
White Pines Software.
UDP
24032
DNS
TCP/UDP
53
Domain Name Server, a service that
matches web names (for example
www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers.
ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL)
User-Defined
50
The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security
Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this
service.
FINGER
TCP
79
Finger is a UNIX or Internet related
command that can be used to find out if a
user is logged on.
FTP
TCP
20
TCP
21
File Transfer Program, a program to enable
fast transfer of files, including large files
that may not be possible by e-mail.
TCP
1720
NetMeeting uses this protocol.
H.323
NBG5715 User’s Guide
247
Appendix F Common Services
Table 90 Commonly Used Services (continued)
248
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
HTTP
TCP
80
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/
server protocol for the world wide web.
HTTPS
TCP
443
HTTPS is a secured http session often used
in e-commerce.
ICMP
User-Defined
Internet Control Message Protocol is often
used for diagnostic or routing purposes.
ICQ
UDP
4000
This is a popular Internet chat program.
IGMP (MULTICAST)
User-Defined
Internet Group Management Protocol is
used when sending packets to a specific
group of hosts.
IKE
UDP
500
The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is
used for key distribution and
management.
IRC
TCP/UDP
6667
This is another popular Internet chat
program.
MSN Messenger
TCP
1863
Microsoft Networks’ messenger service
uses this protocol.
NEW-ICQ
TCP
5190
An Internet chat program.
NEWS
TCP
144
A protocol for news groups.
NFS
UDP
2049
Network File System - NFS is a client/
server distributed file service that provides
transparent file sharing for network
environments.
NNTP
TCP
119
Network News Transport Protocol is the
delivery mechanism for the USENET
newsgroup service.
PING
User-Defined
Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that
sends out ICMP echo requests to test
whether or not a remote host is reachable.
POP3
TCP
110
Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client
computer get e-mail from a POP3 server
through a temporary connection (TCP/IP
or other).
PPTP
TCP
1723
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables
secure transfer of data over public
networks. This is the control channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL
(GRE)
User-Defined
47
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
enables secure transfer of data over public
networks. This is the data channel.
RCMD
TCP
512
Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO
TCP
7070
A streaming audio service that enables
real time sound over the web.
REXEC
TCP
514
Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN
TCP
513
Remote Login.
RTELNET
TCP
107
Remote Telnet.
RTSP
TCP/UDP
554
The Real Time Streaming (media control)
Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for
multimedia on the Internet.
SFTP
TCP
115
Simple File Transfer Protocol.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix F Common Services
Table 90 Commonly Used Services (continued)
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
SMTP
TCP
25
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the
message-exchange standard for the
Internet. SMTP enables you to move
messages from one e-mail server to
another.
SNMP
TCP/UDP
161
Simple Network Management Program.
SNMP-TRAPS
TCP/UDP
162
Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
SQL-NET
TCP
1521
Structured Query Language is an interface
to access data on many different types of
database systems, including mainframes,
midrange systems, UNIX systems and
network servers.
SSH
TCP/UDP
22
Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS
UDP
1558
Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG
UDP
514
Syslog allows you to send system logs to a
UNIX server.
TACACS
UDP
49
Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal
Access Controller Access Control System).
TELNET
TCP
23
Telnet is the login and terminal emulation
protocol common on the Internet and in
UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/
IP networks. Its primary function is to
allow users to log into remote host
systems.
TFTP
UDP
69
Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet
file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but
uses the UDP (User Datagram Protocol)
rather than TCP (Transmission Control
Protocol).
VDOLIVE
TCP
7000
Another videoconferencing solution.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
249
Appendix F Common Services
250
NBG5715 User’s Guide
APPENDIX
Open Software Announcements
End-User License Agreement for "NBG5715"
WARNING: ZyXEL Communications Corp. IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY
UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION
PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM. IF YOU DO
NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS, THEN ZyXEL IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU,
IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE
PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED.
HOWEVER, CERTAIN ZYXEL'S PRODUCTS MAY CONTAIN-IN PART-SOME THIRD PARTY'S FREE AND
OPEN SOFTWARE PROGRAMS WHICH ALLOW YOU TO FREELY COPY, RUN, DISTRIBUTE, MODIFY
AND IMPROVE THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE TERMS OF SUCH THRID PARTY'S
LICENSES ("OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS"). THE OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS ARE LISTED IN
THE NOTICE OR APPENDIX BELOW. ZYXEL MAY HAVE DISTRIBUTED TO YOU HARDWARE AND/OR
SOFTWARE, OR MADE AVAILABLE FOR ELECTRONIC DOWNLOADS THESE FREE SOFTWARE
PROGRAMS OF THRID PARTIES AND YOU ARE LICENSED TO FREELY COPY, MODIFY AND
REDISTIBUTE THAT SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY.
NONE OF THE STATEMENTS OR DOCUMENTATION FROM ZYXEL INCLUDING ANY RESTRICTIONS OR
CONDITIONS STATED IN THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL RESTRICT ANY RIGHTS AND
LICENSES YOU MAY HAVE WITH RESPECT TO THE OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS UNDER THE
APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY.
1.Grant of License for Personal Use
ZyXEL Communications Corp. ("ZyXEL") grants you a non-exclusive, non-sublicense, nontransferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed (the "Software"),
including any documentation files accompanying the Software ("Documentation"), for internal
business use only, for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice. You have the
right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival, back-up or
disaster recovery purposes. You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder. Any
rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL, and all implied licenses are
disclaimed.
2.Ownership
You have no ownership rights in the Software. Rather, you have a license to use the Software as
long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect. Ownership of the Software,
Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL. Any
other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License
Agreement.
3.Copyright
NBG5715 User’s Guide
251
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by international copyright law,
trade secret law, international treaty provisions, and the applicable national laws of each respective
country. All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL. You may not
remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or
Documentation.
4.Restrictions
You may not publish, display, disclose, sell, rent, lease, modify, store, loan, distribute, or create
derivative works of the Software, or any part thereof. You may not assign, sublicense, convey or
otherwise transfer, pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted
hereunder with respect to the Software. ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance,
technical or other support for the resultant modified Software. You may not copy, reverse engineer,
decompile, reverse compile, translate, adapt, or disassemble the Software, or any part thereof, nor
shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software. Except as and
only to the extent expressly permitted in this License, you may not market, co-brand, and private
label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software, or any part thereof. You may not use
the Software, or any part thereof, in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any
other person or entity. You may not cause, assist or permit any third party to do any of the
foregoing. Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright
material. Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the
License Notice as below for the third party software, and your use of such material is exclusively
governed by their respective terms. ZyXEL has provided, as part of the Software package, access to
certain third party software as a convenience. To the extent that the Software contains third party
software, ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for
such software other than compliance with the applicable license terms of such third party, and
makes no warranty (express, implied or statutory) whatsoever with respect thereto. Please contact
the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer
service related to its software and products.
5.Confidentiality
You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby
agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you
use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information. You agree to
reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons
employed by you who come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to
ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions, including, without limitation, not
knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving
the source code of the Software.
6.No Warranty
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, ZyXEL
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE
FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY
HAVE, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE, OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION,
OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE
SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION,
THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF
252
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
THIRTY (30) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE, AND NO WARRANTIES
SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD.
7.Limitation of Liability
IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE,
OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE OR PROGRAM, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY, EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. ZyXEL's TOTAL AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH
RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE,
BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT'S PRICE. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
8.Export Restrictions
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS,
REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR
INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME. YOU
SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE
AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR
OTHER RESTRICTIONS. YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES,
DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, COSTS AND EXPENSES, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS' FEES, TO
THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8.
9.Audit Rights
ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE, TO
PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
10.Termination
This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated. You may terminate this License
Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and
Documentation in your possession or under your control. ZyXEL may terminate this License
Agreement for any reason, including, but not limited to, if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of
the terms of this License Agreement. Upon notification of termination, you agree to destroy or
return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all
known copies, including backup copies, have been destroyed. All provisions relating to
confidentiality, proprietary rights, and non-disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software
License Agreement.
11.General
This License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of
China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof. The exclusive forum for any disputes
arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial
Arbitration Association sitting in ROC, Taiwan if the parties agree to a binding arbitration. This
License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto. This License
Agreement, the rights granted hereunder, the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned
by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL. Any waiver or modification of this License
NBG5715 User’s Guide
253
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto. If any part of
this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the
remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of
the parties.
NOTE: Some components of this product incorporate free software programs covered under the
open source code licenses which allows you to freely copy, modify and redistribute the software. For
at least three (3) years from the date of distribution of the applicable product or software, we will
give to anyone who contacts us at the ZyXEL Technical Support (support@zyxel.com.tw), for a
charge of no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the complete corresponding source code for the version of the Programs
that we distributed to you if we are in possession of such.
Notice
Information herein is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and data used in
examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part may be reproduced or transmitted in
any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, except the express written
permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
This Product includes Busybox, Dnsmasq, e2fsprogs, ethtool, gdbm, haserl, hotplug2, Igmpproxy,
Iproute2, keynote, libnetfilter_conntrack, libnfnetlink, libtool, Mtd-utils, net-tools, ntpclient , radvd,
rp-pppoe, screen, uboot-envtools, uci, udev, Updatedd, Wireless_tools, base-files, bridge-utils,
iptables, linux kermel, openssl, u-boot, uClibc, and gcc under below GPL license
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but
changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License
254
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose
authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU
Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software
(and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it,
that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you
can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or
to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if
you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of
such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you
have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show
them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each
author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no
warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want
its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by
others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger
that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for
everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The
"Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means
either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each
licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted,
and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends
on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in
any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this
License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of
this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a
copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
255
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is
derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it,
when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or
else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these
conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself
is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program
is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are
not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works
in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute
them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a
work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part
regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your
rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation
of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program)
on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of
this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code
or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the
following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a
charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machinereadable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1
and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the
information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.(This alternative is
allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or
executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work
means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work,
complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
interface definition files, plus the
scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special
exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in
either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
256
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place
counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so
long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so,
and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based
on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program
subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the
recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance
by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from
the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free
redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution
of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended
to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the
wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through
any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make
thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or
by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that
distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public
License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but
may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing
version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
NBG5715 User’s Guide
257
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version
or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify
a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted
by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make
exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED
IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM
TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein, if any, are the property of their respective
owners.
This Product includes Dropbear, Lua, and ncurses under the MIT License.
The MIT License
Copyright (c)  
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
258
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEAUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHERLIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.
This Product includes isakmpd, miniupnpd, ipsec-tools, Ppp, and libpcap, under the license by BSD
BSD
Copyright (c) [dates as appropriate to package]
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the University nor of the Laboratory may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This Product includes luci, and uhttpd under the license by Apache software
NBG5715 User’s Guide
259
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction,
and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by
the copyright owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all
other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common
control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition,
"control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the
direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the
outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity
exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications,
including but not limited to software source code, documentation
source, and configuration files.
260
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical
transformation or translation of a Source form, including but
not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation,
and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or
Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a
copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work
(an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object
form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the
editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes
of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of,
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including
the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions
to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally
submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner
or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of
the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted"
means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent
to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to
communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems,
NBG5715 User’s Guide
261
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the
Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but
excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity
on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and
subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of,
publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the
Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
(except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made,
use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work,
where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable
by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s)
with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You
institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work
or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct
262
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses
granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate
as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the
Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without
modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You
meet the following conditions:
(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or
Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices
stating that You changed the files; and
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works
that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and
attribution notices from the Source form of the Work,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works; and
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its
distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must
include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained
within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one
of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed
as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or
NBG5715 User’s Guide
263
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or,
within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and
wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents
of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and
do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside
or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided
that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed
as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and
may provide additional or different license terms and conditions
for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or
for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use,
reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with
the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise,
any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work
by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of
this License, without any additional terms or conditions.
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify
the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed
with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade
names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor,
except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the
264
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or
agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or
implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions
of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any
risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory,
whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise,
unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly
negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be
liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a
result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the
Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill,
work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all
other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor
has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing
the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer,
and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity,
or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this
NBG5715 User’s Guide
265
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only
on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf
of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify,
defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason
of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following
boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets "[]"
replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include
the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate
comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a
file or class name and description of purpose be included on the
same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier
identification within third-party archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
266
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
limitations under the License.
This Product includes gmp, and libcli under the LGPL License.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but
changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the
successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use
it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the
ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the
explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software
(and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it;
that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are
informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights
or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for
you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
267
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you.You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the
recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and
recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you
this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free
library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know
that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be
affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to
make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a
restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a
version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public
License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries,
and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain
libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the
combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The
ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its
criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other
code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's
freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers
Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we
use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides
advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use
of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must
be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as
widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free
software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. In other cases, permission to use a
particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of
free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables
many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux
operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure
that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to
run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library".
The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the
library in order to run.
268
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION
AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice
placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the
terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License").
Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently
linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under
these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
included without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a
library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of
the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted,
and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends
on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy
an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to
this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your
option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based
on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a
software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be
licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the
modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that
uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must
make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or
table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For
example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined
independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied
function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the
square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified
work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be
reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its
terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the
distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
NBG5715 User’s Guide
269
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely
by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective
works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this
License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this
License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this
License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has
appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in
these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the
ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made
from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a
program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in
object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you
accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the
requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with
the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work,
in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this
License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a
derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses
the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for
distribution of such executables. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header
file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library
even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not
precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure
layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length),
then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work.
(Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work
under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the
Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that
work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the
customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give
prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and
its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during
execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among
them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of
270
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source
code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed
under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the
complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so
that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing
the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in
the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one
that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system,
rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a
modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interfacecompatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written
offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a,
above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the
work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy
the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a
copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the
required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs
needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be
distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form)
with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the
executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary
libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you
cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single
library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a
combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of
the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a)
Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined
with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b)
Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the
Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have
their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so,
and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on
it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the
Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the
recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance
by third parties with this License.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
271
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from
the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free
redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution
of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended
to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the
wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through
any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make
thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or
by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that
distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing
version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version
or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software
which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the
free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of
software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN
WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
272
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY
TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
This Product includes zlib under the zlib License
/* zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose compression library
version 1.2.2, October 3rd, 2004
Copyright (C) 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied
warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages
arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose,
including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not
claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software
in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
273
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
Jean-loup Gailly jloup@gzip.org
Mark Adler madler@alumni.caltech.edu
*/
This Product includes lldt under the following license
274
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
NBG5715 User’s Guide
275
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
276
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
NBG5715 User’s Guide
277
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
278
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
NBG5715 User’s Guide
279
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
280
NBG5715 User’s Guide
APPENDIX
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2011 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or
software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent
rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein
without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
TradeMarks
NetUSB is a trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this
publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective
owners.
Notices
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
281
Appendix H Legal Information
This device is designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz and/or 5 GHz networks throughout the EC region and
Switzerland, with restrictions in France.
Ce produit est conçu pour les bandes de fréquences 2,4 GHz et/ou 5 GHz conformément à la
législation Européenne. En France métropolitaine, suivant les décisions n°03-908 et 03-909 de
l’ARCEP, la puissance d’émission ne devra pas dépasser 10 mW (10 dB) dans le cadre d’une
installation WiFi en extérieur pour les fréquences comprises entre 2454 MHz et 2483,5 MHz.
Viewing Certifications
Go to http://www.zyxel.com.
Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page.
Select the certification you wish to view from this page.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in
materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the
warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to
faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective
products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall
deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any
replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or
higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the
product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to
abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of
merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for
indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty
policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/
support_warranty_info.php.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at
www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
282
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix H Legal Information
End-User License Agreement
WARNING: ZyXEL Communications Corp. IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE ENCLOSED SOFTWARE TO
YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS
LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE
INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS, THEN ZyXEL, INC. IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE
SOFTWARE TO YOU, IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND
PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE
REFUNDED.
Grant of License for Personal Use
ZyXEL Communications Corp. ("ZyXEL") grants you a non-exclusive, non-sublicense, nontransferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed (the "Software"),
including any documentation files accompanying the Software ("Documentation"), for internal
business use only, for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice. You have the
right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival, back-up or
disaster recovery purposes. You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder. Any
rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL, and all implied licenses are
disclaimed.
Ownership
You have no ownership rights in the Software. Rather, you have a license to use the Software as
long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect. Ownership of the Software,
Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL. Any
other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License
Agreement.
Copyright
The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by United States Copyright Law
and trade secret law, and by international treaty provisions. All rights not granted to you herein are
expressly reserved by ZyXEL. You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its
licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation.
Restrictions
You may not publish, display, disclose, sell, rent, lease, modify, store, loan, distribute, or create
derivative works of the Software, or any part thereof. You may not assign, sublicense, convey or
otherwise transfer, pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted
hereunder with respect to the Software. Certain components of the Software, and third party open
source programs included with the Software, have been or may be made available by ZyXEL on its
Open Source web site (ftp://opensource.zyxel.com) (collectively the "Open-Sourced Components")
You may modify or replace only these Open-Sourced Components; provided that you comply with
the terms of this License and any applicable licensing terms governing use of the Open-Sourced
Components. ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance, technical or other support for the
resultant modified Software. You may not copy, reverse engineer, decompile, reverse compile,
translate, adapt, or disassemble the Software, or any part thereof, nor shall you attempt to create
the source code from the object code for the Software. Except as and only to the extent expressly
permitted in this License, by applicable licensing terms governing use of the Open-Sourced
Components, or by applicable law, you may not market, co-brand, private label or otherwise permit
third parties to link to the Software, or any part thereof. You may not use the Software, or any part
NBG5715 User’s Guide
283
Appendix H Legal Information
thereof, in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity. You
may not cause, assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing. Portions of the Software
utilize or include third party software and other copyright material. Acknowledgements, licensing
terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the online electronic documentation for the
Software (ftp://opensource.zyxel.com), and your use of such material is governed by their
respective terms. ZyXEL has provided, as part of the Software package, access to certain third
party software as a convenience. To the extent that the Software contains third party software,
ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such
software. Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical
support and customer service related to its software and products.
Confidentiality
You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby
agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you
use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information. You agree to
reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons
employed by you who come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to
ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions, including, without limitation, not
knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving
the source code of the Software.
No Warranty
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, ZyXEL
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE
SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE
WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE, OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION, OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR
ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH
ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION
OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE
UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED
WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF THIRTY (30) DAYS FROM THE
DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE, AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD.
Limitation of Liability
IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE,
OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY, EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. ZyXEL's AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS
OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND
DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE, BUT SHALL IN NO
EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT°ØS PRICE. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW
THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES,
THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
284
Export Restrictions
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Appendix H Legal Information
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS,
REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR
INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME. YOU
SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE
AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR
OTHER RESTRICTIONS. YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES,
DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, COSTS AND EXPENSES, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS' FEES, TO
THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8.
Audit Rights
ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE, TO
PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
10 Termination
This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated. You may terminate this License
Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and
Documentation in your possession or under your control. ZyXEL may terminate this License
Agreement for any reason, including, but not limited to, if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of
the terms of this License Agreement. Upon notification of termination, you agree to destroy or
return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all
known copies, including backup copies, have been destroyed. All provisions relating to
confidentiality, proprietary rights, and non-disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software
License Agreement.
11 General
This License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of
China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof. The exclusive forum for any disputes
arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial
Arbitration Association sitting in ROC, Taiwan. This License Agreement shall constitute the entire
Agreement between the parties hereto. This License Agreement, the rights granted hereunder, the
Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of
ZyXEL. Any waiver or modification of this License Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing
and signed by both parties hereto. If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or
unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this License Agreement shall
be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties.
Note: Some components of this product incorporate source code covered under the
Apache License, GPL License, LGPL License, Sun License, and Castor License. To
obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please check ftp://
opensource.zyxel.com to get it.
NBG5715 User’s Guide
285
Appendix H Legal Information
286
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Index
Index
CTS (Clear to Send) 236
Address Assignment 72
Advanced Encryption Standard
See AES.
AES 241
Daylight saving 166
AH 140
DDNS 113
see also Dynamic DNS
service providers 114
algorithms 140
alternative subnet mask notation 197
antenna
directional 245
gain 245
omni-directional 245
DH 146
AP (access point) 235
DHCP server 96, 99
Bandwidth management
overview 147
priority 149
DHCP 38, 99
DHCP server
see also Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DHCP table 38
DHCP client information
DHCP status
Diffie-Hellman key groups 146
Dimensions 179
disclaimer 281
DNS 101
Basic Service Set, See BSS 233
DNS Server 72
bridged APs, security 82
DNS server 101
BSS 233
Domain Name System 101
Domain Name System. See DNS.
duplex setting 58
Dynamic DNS 113
CA 240
dynamic WEP key exchange 240
Certificate Authority
See CA.
DynDNS 114
certifications
notices 281
viewing 282
DynDNS Wildcard 113
channel 80, 235
interference 235
Configuration
restore 168
EAP Authentication 239
copyright 281
CPU usage 57
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 99
DynDNS see also DDNS 114
encapsulation 141
encryption 81, 241
287
Index
and local (user) database 82
key 82
WPA compatible 82
see also Internet Group Multicast Protocol
version
IGMP version 73
ESP 140
IKE phases 142
ESS 234
IKE SA
aggressive mode 125
IP address, remote IPSec router 126
IP address, ZyXEL Device 125
main mode 125
negotiation mode 125
ESSID 175
Extended Service Set, See ESS 234
Firewall 120
Firewall overview
guidelines 120
ICMP packets 121
network security
Stateful inspection 120
ZyXEL device firewall 120
IKE SA. See also VPN.
Independent Basic Service Set
See IBSS 233
initialization vector (IV) 242
inside header 141
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
See IANA 202
Internet Group Multicast Protocol 73
firewall
stateful inspection 119
Internet Key Exchange 142
Firmware upload 166
file extension
using HTTP
IP Address 97, 98, 106
firmware version 57
fragmentation threshold 236
General wireless LAN screen 82
Internet Protocol Security. See IPSec.
IP Pool 100
IPSec 124
algorithms 140
architecture 140
NAT 143
IPSec SA
authentication key (manual keys) 135
encryption key (manual keys) 135
local policy 126
manual keys 135
remote policy 126
when IKE SA is disconnected 126
IPSec SA. See also VPN.
IPSec. See also VPN.
hidden node 235
IANA 202
LAN 95
IP pool setup 96
IBSS 233
LAN overview 95
ID type and content 144
LAN setup 95
IEEE 802.11g 237
LAN TCP/IP 96
IGMP 73
Link type 58
288
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Index
local (user) database 81
and encryption 82
Local Area Network 95
outside header 141
MAC 88
Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 242, 243
MAC address 72, 80
cloning 72
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet 75
MAC address filter 80
MAC address filtering 88
MAC filter 88
managing the device
good habits 22
using the web configurator. See web configurator.
using the WPS. See WPS.
Pool Size 100
Port forwarding 106, 110
default server 106, 110
example 110
local server 106
port numbers
services
port speed 58
Media access control 88
Power Specification 179
Memory usage 58
PPPoE 75
dial-up connection
Message Integrity Check (MIC) 241
Multicast 73
IGMP 73
preamble mode 237
pre-shared key 145
product registration 282
PSK 242
NAT 103, 106, 202
global 104
how it works 105
inside 104
IPSec 143
local 104
outside 104
overview 103
port forwarding 110
see also Network Address Translation
server 104
server sets 110
traversal 144
NAT Traversal 155
Quality of Service (QoS) 90
RADIUS 238
message types 239
messages 239
shared secret key 239
RADIUS server 81
Navigation Panel 58
registration
product 282
navigation panel 58
related documentation 3
negotiation mode 142
Remote management
and NAT 152
limitations 152
system timeout 153
Network Address Translation 103, 106
NBG5715 User’s Guide
289
Index
Reset button 35
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) 241
Reset the device 35
Time setting 165
Restore configuration 168
transport mode 141
RF (Radio Frequency) 180
trigger port 111
Roaming 90
Trigger port forwarding 111
example 111
process 111
Router Mode
status screen 56
RTS (Request To Send) 236
threshold 235, 236
tunnel mode 141
RTS/CTS Threshold 80, 90
safety warnings 7
Universal Plug and Play 155
Application 155
Security issues 155
Scheduling 93
UPnP 155
security associations. See VPN.
Security Parameter Index 134
Service and port numbers 123, 151
Service Set 51, 83
user authentication 81
local (user) database 81
RADIUS server 81
User Name 114
Service Set IDentification 51, 83
Service Set IDentity. See SSID.
SPI 134
SSID 51, 57, 80, 83
stateful inspection firewall 119
Static DHCP 100
Static Route 115
Status 56
subnet 195
Subnet Mask 97, 98
subnet mask 196
subnetting 198
Summary
DHCP table 38
Packet statistics 40
Wireless station status 41
syntax conventions 5
Virtual Private Network. See VPN.
VPN 124
established in two phases 125
IKE SA. See IKE SA.
IPSec 124
IPSec SA. See IPSec SA.
local network 124
remote IPSec router 124
remote network 124
security associations (SA) 125
VPN. See also IKE SA, IPSec SA.
System General Setup 163
WAN (Wide Area Network) 71
WAN MAC address 72
warranty 282
note 282
TCP/IP configuration 99
Web Configurator
how to access 33
Temperature 179
290
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Index
Overview 33
web configurator 22
application example 243
WPS 22
WEP Encryption 86, 87
WEP encryption 85
WEP key 85
Wi-Fi Protected Access 241
Wildcard 113
Wireless association list 41
wireless channel 175
wireless client WPA supplicants 242
wireless LAN 175
wireless LAN scheduling 93
Wireless network
basic guidelines 79
channel 80
encryption 81
example 79
MAC address filter 80
overview 79
security 80
SSID 80
Wireless security 80
overview 80
type 80
wireless security 175, 237
Wireless tutorial 61
WLAN
interference 235
security parameters 244
WPA 241
key caching 242
pre-authentication 242
user authentication 242
vs WPA-PSK 242
wireless client supplicant 242
with RADIUS application example 243
WPA compatible 82
WPA2 241
user authentication 242
vs WPA2-PSK 242
wireless client supplicant 242
with RADIUS application example 243
WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 241
WPA2-PSK 241, 242
application example 243
WPA-PSK 241, 242
NBG5715 User’s Guide
291
Index
292
NBG5715 User’s Guide
Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Operations in the 5.15-5.25GHz band are restricted to indoor usage only.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance
20cm between the radiator & your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
以下警語適用台灣地區
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功
率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並
改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信。低功率射頻電
機須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
在5.25-5.35秭赫(GHz)頻帶內操作之無線資訊傳輸設備，限於室內使用。
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Copy, Extract
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-701
Create Date                     : 2011:08:05 13:20:11+08:00
Creator Tool                    : pdfFactory Pro www.ahasoft.com.tw/FinePrint
Modify Date                     : 2011:09:06 13:21:24+08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2011:09:06 13:21:24+08:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : sam
Title                           : NBG5715_UG_v1-00_ed1_2011-04-01.pdf
Producer                        : pdfFactory Pro 3.10 (Windows XP Professional Chinese)
Document ID                     : uuid:72269cda-0199-48c8-aa2e-6656d7c3719f
Instance ID                     : uuid:e5b2b72d-d293-4bae-88d1-40f2cffaeed9
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 292
Author                          : sam

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: I88NBG5715

				
				

							
		
		

			
Navigation menu